2018 Jeep MP Compass User&#39

2018 Jeep MP Compass User&#39
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your
vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident, or scheduling your next
appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep® brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride.
To get this app, go directly to the App Store or Google Play and enter the search keyword “JEEP”
(U.S. residents only).
www.jeep.com /en /owners (U.S.) provides special offers tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries,
personalized service records and more. To get this information, just create an account and check back often.
Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s
Manual, Navigation / Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle
by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the
“Popular Topics” area of the mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow
the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S. residents);
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).
18MP-926-AA
COMPASS
Fourth Edition
User Guide
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY of the most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
media and warranty booklet by visiting:
Jeep.com (U.S.)
Jeep.ca (Canada)
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
2 01 8 CO MPASS U S E R G U I D E
This guide has been prepared to help you get
quickly acquainted with your new Jeep® brand
vehicle and to provide a convenient reference
source for common questions. However, it is not
a substitute for your Owner’s Manual.
Important
Get warranty and other information online – you can
review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties
provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting
www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the
www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada)
homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable
year, make and model of your vehicle.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the
vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly
recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any
device or feature that may take their attention off the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers,
portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver
while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious
collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be
done while the vehicle is moving.
If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or
texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply
with all local laws.
For complete operational instructions, maintenance
procedures and important safety messages, please
consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals found on the website on the back cover
and other Warning Labels in your vehicle.
Not all features shown in this guide may apply
to your vehicle. For additional information on
accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada)
or your local Jeep® brand dealer.
Driving and Alcohol
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with
blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to a collision.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
ALWAYS drive safely and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibility and assume all risks related to the use of
the features and applications in this vehicle.
Only use the features and applications when
it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result
in an accident involving serious injury or
death.
This guide illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are
either standard or optional on this vehicle.
This guide may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment
described in this guide that are not available
on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the
right to make changes in design and specifications and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
This User Guide has been prepared to help
you quickly become acquainted with the important features of your vehicle. It contains
most things you will need to operate and
maintain the vehicle, including emergency
information.
When it comes to service, remember that your
authorized dealer knows your Jeep® vehicle
best, has factory-trained technicians and
genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
HOW TO FIND YOUR
OWNER’S MANUAL ONLINE
This publication has been prepared as a reference item to help you quickly become acquainted with the most important features
and processes of your vehicle. It contains
most things you will need to operate and
maintain the vehicle, including emergency
information and procedures.
This User Guide is not a replacement for the full
Owner’s Manual, and does not fully cover every
operation and procedure possible with your vehicle.
For more detailed descriptions of the topics
discussed in this User Guide, as well as
information covering features and processes
not covered in this User Guide, the full vehicle Owner’s Manual can be accessed for
free online in a printer-friendly PDF format.
To get the full Owner’s Manual or applicable
supplement for your vehicle, follow the appropriate web address below:
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html
(U.S. Residents)
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents)
FCA US LLC is committed to protecting our
environment and natural resources. By converting from paper to electronic delivery for
the majority of the user information for your
vehicle, together we greatly reduce the demand for tree-based products and lessen the
stress on our environment.
1
WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA
US LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents
precision workmanship, distinctive styling,
and high quality.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Each time direction instructions (left/right or
forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are
given, these must be intended as regarding
an occupant in the driver's seat. Special
cases not complying with this rule will be
properly specified in the text.
The figures in this User Guide are provided by
way of example only: this might imply that
some details of the image do not correspond
to the actual arrangement of your vehicle.
In addition, the User Guide has been conceived considering vehicles with steering
wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible
that on vehicles with steering wheel on the
right side, the position or construction of
some controls is not exactly mirror-like with
respect to the figure.
To identify the chapter with the information
needed you can consult the index at the end
of this User Guide.
2
Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd
page. A few pages further there is a key for
getting to know the chapter order and the
relevant symbols in the tabs. There is always
a textual indication of the current chapter at
the side of each even page.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving actions that can
cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or
fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels whose symbols indicate precautions to
be observed when using this component.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This
vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a
higher center of gravity than many passenger
vehicles. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven
in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out
of control. Because of the higher center of
gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may
roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat
belts provided is a major cause of severe or
fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government
notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by
10,000 or more each year and could reduce
disabling injuries by two million annually. In
a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
While reading this User Guide you will find a
series of WARNINGS to be followed to prevent incorrect use of components which
could cause accidents or injuries.
There are also CAUTIONS that must be followed to prevent against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
3
4
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SAFETY
STARTING AND OPERATING
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MULTIMEDIA
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX
6
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL. . . . . . . . . . .8
INTERIOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9
7
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Air Vents
2 — Multifunction Lever
3 — Instrument Cluster
8
4 — Windshield Wiper Lever
5 — Radio
6 — Steering Wheel
INTERIOR
Interior Features
1 — Power Window Switches/Door Locks
2 — Seats
3 — Climate Controls
4 — Gear Selector
5 — Switch Panel
6 — Glove Compartment
9
10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
IGNITION SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . .14
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition . . . . . . .14
Vehicle On Message . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED . .16
How To Use Remote Start —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit . . . . .21
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . .22
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With
Fold-Flat Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
Headlight Time Delay . . . . . . . . . .
Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . .
Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . .
HEAD RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . .24
WIPER AND WASHERS . . . . . . . .31
Front Head Restraint Adjustment . . . . .24
Rear Head Restraints. . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Front Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . .32
Rear Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . .18
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
STEERING WHEEL . . . . . . . . . . .27
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Rearming Of The System . . . . .
To Arm The System . . . . . . . .
To Disarm The System . . . . . . .
Security System Manual Override
EXTERIOR LIGHTS. . . . . . . . . . . .28
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.18
.18
.19
.19
DOORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry . . .19
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column . . . . .27
Heated Steering Wheel. . . . . . . . . . . .27
Folding Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . .28
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . .29
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.29
.29
.29
.30
.30
.30
.31
CLIMATE CONTROLS. . . . . . . . . .33
Climate Controls With A Touchscreen
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . .41
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Power Window Controls . . . . . . . . . . .43
Auto-Down Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch
Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . .
Window Lockout Switch . . . . . .
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.44
.44
.44
.44
POWER SUNROOF —
IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
12
Wind Buffeting . . . . . .
Power Sun Shade . . . . .
Pinch Protection Feature
Sunroof Maintenance. . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.46
.46
.47
.47
Opening. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
Power Liftgate — If Equipped . . . . . . .49
HOOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . .52
Opening The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Closing The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . .51
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
KEYS
The emergency key allows for entry into the
vehicle should the battery in the vehicle or
the key fob go dead. The emergency key is
also for locking the glove compartment. You
can keep the emergency key with you when
valet parking.
Key Fob
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system.
The ignition system consists of a key fob with
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/
STOP push button ignition system. The Remote Keyless Entry system consists of a key
fob and Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if
equipped.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be found if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic device; these devices may block the
key fob’s wireless signal.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the
doors and liftgate from distances up to approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a handheld
key fob. The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch at the top of the key fob
sideways with your thumb and then pull the
key out with your other hand.
NOTE:
You can insert the double-sided emergency
key into the lock cylinders with either side up.
Keyless Ignition Key Fob
1 — Unlock
2 — Lock
3 — Remote Start
4 — Panic
5 — Emergency
Key
The key fob also includes an emergency key,
which stores in the rear of the key fob.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the
key fob once to unlock the driver's door or
twice within five seconds to unlock all doors
and the liftgate.
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the
first push of the unlock button. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your
Owner’s Manual for further information.
13
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the lock button on the key
fob to lock all doors and liftgate.
Request For Additional Key Fobs
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
WARNING!
• Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving
the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
mode.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at
your authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key fob to the
vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
14
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you
to your authorized dealer.
IGNITION SWITCH
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition with the push of a button as long as
the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP push button ignition has
three operating modes. The three modes are
OFF, ON/RUN, and START.
NOTE:
If the ignition state/mode does not change
with the push of a button, the key fob may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a
back up method can be used to operate the
ignition switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the emergency key) of the key fob
against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
• The engine is stopped.
• Some electrical devices (e.g. Central locking, alarm, etc.) are still available.
ON/RUN
• Driving mode.
• All the electrical devices are available.
START
• Start the engine.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock
your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury
or death.
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the
automatic transmission into PARK, apply the parking brake, place the engine
in the OFF position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock your vehicle.
Always make sure the keyless ignition is
in “OFF” position, remove the key fob
from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition in
the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
NOTE:
For further information, refer to "Starting The
Engine" in "Starting And Operating."
Vehicle On Message
When opening the driver's door and the ignition is in ON/RUN (engine not running)
mode, a chime will sound to remind you to
place the ignition in the OFF mode. In addition to the chime, the Vehicle On message
will display in the cluster.
NOTE:
The power window switches and power sunroof (if equipped) will remain active for three
minutes after the ignition is cycled to the OFF
mode. Opening either front door will cancel
this feature. The time for this feature is
programmable.
15
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
heat build-up may cause serious injury
or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
• To drive the vehicle, push unlock button,
insert the key in the ignition and turn to the
ON/RUN position.
• System not disabled from previous remote
start event
• With remote start, the engine will only run
for 15 minutes (timeout) unless the ignition key is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position
• The vehicle must be started with the key
after two consecutive timeouts.
• Vehicle security alarm is not signaling an
intrusion
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
WARNING!
• Gear selector in PARK
REMOTE START — IF
EQUIPPED
How To Use Remote Start — If Equipped
• Push remote start button on
the key fob twice within five
seconds. Pushing the remote
start button a third time shuts
the engine off.
16
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Liftgate closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• Check engine light shall not be present
• PANIC button not pushed
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious
injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Operation of the Remote Start System, windows, door locks or other controls could
cause serious injury or death.
General Information
SENTRY KEY
Replacement Keys
The following regulatory statement applies to
all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling
the engine. The system does not need to be
armed or activated. Operation is automatic,
regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or
unlocked.
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems
may result in vehicle starting problems
and loss of security protection.
• Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving
the vehicle unattended.
• For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in the OFF
position.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada licenseexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics.
NOTE:
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at
your authorized dealer. This procedure consists of programming a blank key fob to the
vehicle electronics. A blank key fob is one
that has never been programmed.
17
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you
to your authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
Programming key fobs may be performed at
your authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada licenseexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
18
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
— IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition for unauthorized operation. While the vehicle security alarm is
armed, interior switches for door locks and
liftgate release are disabled. If something
triggers the alarm, the vehicle security alarm
will provide the following audible and visible
signals:
• The horn will pulse
• The turn signals will flash
• The vehicle security light in the instrument
cluster will flash
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action
is taken to disarm it, the vehicle security
alarm will turn the horn off after approximately 90 seconds, and then the vehicle
security alarm will rearm itself.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security
alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the “OFF” mode.
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
• Push the lock button on the interior
power door lock switch with the driver
and/or passenger door open.
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Cycle the ignition out of the off mode to
disarm the system.
NOTE:
• The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate button on the key fob cannot arm or
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
• The vehicle security alarm remains armed
during power liftgate entry. Pushing the
liftgate button will not disarm the vehicle
security alarm. If someone enters the vehicle through the liftgate and opens any
door, the alarm will sound.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will
not unlock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to
protect your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a
false alarm. If one of the previously described
arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in
the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will
sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle
security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle
security alarm will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
without having to push the key fob lock or
unlock buttons.
To Unlock From The Driver's Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the
front driver door handle to unlock the driver's
door automatically.
Security System Manual Override
The vehicle security alarm will not arm if you
lock the doors using the manual door lock
plunger.
DOORS
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement
to the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system
and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry. This feature allows you to lock and
unlock the vehicle’s door(s) and fuel door
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed, all doors will unlock when you grab
19
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
hold of the front driver’s door handle. To
select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Push” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,”
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s manual for further information.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with
passive entry. There are three situations that
trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any passive
entry vehicle:
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab
the front passenger door handle to unlock all
four doors and the liftgate automatically.
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when the front passenger door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry
Key Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature which
will function if the ignition switch is in the
OFF position.
20
• A lock request is made by a valid Passive
Entry key fob while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all
open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search
will be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry
key fob inside the car and it does not find any
Passive Entry key fobs outside the car, then
the car will unlock and alert the customer.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside
the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the
doors when any of the following conditions
are true:
• The doors are manually locked using the
door lock knobs.
• There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5m) of
either Passive Entry door handle.
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then close
the doors.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate passive entry unlock feature is
built into liftgate handle release. With a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of
the liftgate, push the electronic liftgate release to open with one fluid motion.
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the passive entry
lock button located to the right of liftgate
handle release.
NOTE:
The liftgate passive entry lock button will lock
all doors and the liftgate. The liftgate unlock
feature is built into the electronic liftgate
release.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
• If Passive Entry is disabled using the
Uconnect System, the key protection described in "Preventing Inadvertent Locking
of Passive Entry key fob in Vehicle" remains
active/functional.
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or
passenger front door handles, push the passive entry lock button located on the outside
door handle, to lock the vehicle doors and
liftgate.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is dead.
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using
the lock button located on the vehicle’s interior door panel.
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing
the door handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When
Locking
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock
or unlock the doors, using either Passive
Entry door handle. This is done to allow you
to check if the vehicle is locked by pulling
the door handle without the vehicle reacting and unlocking.
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles with power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The transmission gear selector was not in
PARK, then is placed in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
21
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors
WARNING!
more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
To provide a safer environment for small children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors
are equipped with a Child-Protection Door
Lock system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a
flat blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and
rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position.
When the system on a door is engaged, that
door can only be opened by using the outside
door handle even if the inside door lock is in
the unlocked position.
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped
SEATS
The front heated seats control buttons are
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control buttons through
the climate screen or the controls screen.
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
• Press the heated seat button
turn the HI setting on.
once to
WARNING!
• Press the heated seat button
time to turn the LO setting on.
a second
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
22
a third
• Press the heated seat button
time to turn the heating elements off.
If your vehicle is equipped with automatic
temperature controls with an integrated center stack, or manual temperature controls,
you’ll find the heated seat switches on the
switch bank below the radio screen.
If the HI level setting is selected, the system
will automatically switch to LO level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO
level setting will turn off automatically after
approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
Vehicles With Remote Start — If Equipped
On models that are equipped with remote
start, the heated seats can be programmed to
come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s
Manual for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must
exercise care when using the seat
heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or
seatback that insulates against heat,
such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has been overheated
could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the
seat.
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With
Fold-Flat Feature
Rear Seat Release Lever
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be
necessary to position the front seat to its
mid-track position. Also, be sure that the
front seats are fully upright and positioned
forward. This will allow the rear seat to fold
down easily.
To provide additional storage area, each rear
seat can be folded flat. This allows for extended cargo space and still maintains some
rear seating room.
23
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
To Lower The Rear Seat
1. Pull the seatback release lever located on
either side of the upper outer edge of the
seat.
2. Fold that side of the rear seatback completely forward.
To Raise The Rear Seat
NOTE:
If interference from the cargo area prevents
the seatback from fully locking, you will have
difficulty returning the seat to its proper
position.
24
Raise the seatback and lock it into place.
The release lever will show a red indicator
while in the unlocked position. Once the seat
is locked in, the red indicator will no longer
be visible.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will
not provide the proper stability for child
seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the
risk of injury by restricting head movement in
the event of a rear impact. Head restraints
should be adjusted so that the top of the head
restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver,
should not operate a vehicle or sit in a
WARNING!
vehicle’s seat until the head restraints
are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints
improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making
the rear of the head restraint face forward) in
an attempt to gain additional clearance to the
back of your head.
Front Head Restraint Adjustment
Your vehicle is equipped with front four way
driver and passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on
the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located
at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed
by qualified technicians, for service purposes
only. If either of the head restraints require
removal, see your authorized dealer.
To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the
top of the head restraint toward the front of
the vehicle as desired and release. To adjust
the head restraint rearward, pull the top of
the head restraint to the forward most position and release. The head restraint will return to the rear most position.
WARNING!
Head Restraint (Normal Position)
• All occupants, including the driver,
should not operate a vehicle or sit in a
vehicle’s seat until the head restraints
are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash.
• Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints
improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the event
of a collision.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button
Head Restraint (Adjusted Position)
25
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Head Restraints
The rear head restraints have two positions:
up or down. When the center seat is being
occupied, the head restraint should be in the
raised position. When there is no occupant in
the center seat, the head restraint can be
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on
the head restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjustment button, located
at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
Outboard Head Restraint Adjustment
Button
Center Head Restraint Adjustment Button
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed
by qualified technicians, for service purposes
only. If either of the head restraints require
removal, see your authorized dealer.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect
the occupants.
26
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows
you to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/telescoping lever is located below the steering wheel at the end of the
steering column.
To unlock the steering column, push the
control handle downward (toward the floor).
To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the steering wheel outward or push it inward
as desired. To lock the steering column in
position, push the control handle upward
until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column
while driving or driving with the steering
column unlocked, could cause the driver
to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury or death.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
operate for an average of 80 minutes or more
before automatically shutting off. This time
may vary depending on environmental temperatures. The heated steering wheel can
shut off early or may not turn on when the
steering wheel is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control button through the
climate screen or the controls screen.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
• Press the heated steering wheel button
a second time to turn the heating element
off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Heated Steering Wheel
Vehicles With Remote Start — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with a heated
steering wheel, it contains a heating element
that will keep your hands warm in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel has only
one temperature setting. Once the heated
steering wheel has been turned on, it can
On models that are equipped with remote
start, the heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on during a remote start
through the Uconnect system. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
27
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other physical conditions must
exercise care when using the steering
wheel heater. It may cause burns even at
low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods.
• Do not place anything on the steering
wheel that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or steering wheel covers of
any type and material. This may cause
the steering wheel heater to overheat.
MIRRORS
Folding Mirrors
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the
mirror to pivot forward or rearward to help
avoid damage. The mirror has three detent
positions: full forward, normal and full rearward.
28
Power Folding Mirror — If Equipped
Puddle Lamps — If Equipped
The switch for the power folding mirrors is
located in the power mirror switch.
Located under the exterior mirrors is a small
lamp that illuminates the ground when the
doors are unlocked with the key fob or when
the doors to the vehicle are open.
Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold
in, pushing the switch a second time will
return the mirrors to the normal driving position.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while
folding.
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice.
This feature will be activated whenever you
turn on the rear window defroster (if
equipped). Refer to “Climate Controls” in
this section for further information.
• The mirrors are accidentally manually
folded/unfolded.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.
Headlight Switch
• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal
driving speeds.
The headlight switch is located on
the left side of the instrument
panel. This switch controls the operation of the headlights, parking lights, automatic headlights — if equipped, instrument panel lights, instrument panel light
dimming, interior lights and fog lights — if
equipped.
You may need to reset the power folding
mirrors if the following occurs:
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and
unfold them by pushing the button. (this may
require multiple button pushes). This resets
them to their normal position.
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If
Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights will turn on
when the engine is started and remain on
unless the headlamps are turned on or the
ignition is turned OFF.
Headlight Switch
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Rotate Headlight
Push Fog
Ambient Light Dimmer
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the
first detent for parking light and instrument
panel light operation. Rotate the headlight
switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light and instrument panel light operation.
NOTE:
If allowed by law in the country in which the
vehicle was purchased the Daytime Running
Lights can be turned on and off using the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s
Manual for further details.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward
the instrument panel to switch the
headlights to high beams. Pulling the multifunction lever back toward the steering wheel
will return the lights to low beams.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunc-
tion lever toward you. This will cause the high
beam headlights to turn on, and remain on,
until the lever is released.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights on or off according to ambient light
levels. To turn the system on, rotate the
headlight switch clockwise to the last detent
for automatic headlight operation. When the
system is on, the headlight time delay feature
is also on. This means the headlights will stay
on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the
automatic system off, move the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the headlights will come on in the automatic mode.
Headlight Time Delay
This feature provides the safety of headlight
illumination for up to 90 seconds (programmable) when leaving your vehicle in an unlit
area.
29
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition in the OFF position while the headlights
are still on. Then, turn off the headlights
within 45 seconds. The delay interval begins
when the headlight switch is turned off.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
Turn Signals
The front fog light switch is built into the
headlight switch.
If you turn the headlights or parking lights on,
or place the ignition in ACC or RUN, the
system will cancel the delay.
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and
push the headlight switch. To turn off the
front fog lights, either push the headlight
switch a second time or turn off the headlight
switch.
Move the multifunction lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster display flash to show proper operation
of the front and rear turn signal lights.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition, they will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
• The lights must be turned off within
45 seconds of placing the ignition in the
OFF position to activate this feature. If the
headlight switch is in the AUTO position
prior to turning the ignition OFF, there is no
need to turn the headlight switch to off to
activate Headlight Delay.
• The headlight delay time is programmable
using the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in
the Owner’s Manual for further details.
30
An indicator light in the instrument cluster
illuminates when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE:
The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However, selecting the high beam headlights will turn off
the fog lights.
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the turn signals, headlight beam selection and passing lights. The multifunction
lever is located on the left side of the steering
column.
NOTE:
• If either light remains on and does not
flash, or there is a very fast flash rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb. If an
indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator
bulb is defective.
• A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in
the instrument cluster display and a continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with
either turn signal on.
• When the Daytime Running Lights are on
and a turn signal is activated, the Daytime
Running Lamp will turn off on the side of
the vehicle in which the turn signal is
flashing. The Daytime Running Lamp will
turn back on when the turn signal is turned
off.
Lane Change Assist
Front Wipers
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond the detent, and the turn signal
(right or left) will flash three times then
automatically turn off.
The windshield wiper/washer controls are located on the multifunction lever on the right
side of the steering column. The front wipers
are operated by rotating a switch, located on
the end of the lever. For information on the
rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Wiper” in
this section.
WIPER AND WASHERS
CAUTION!
Front Wiper Operation
Intermittent, Low And High Operation
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first
two detent positions for intermittent settings.
The first intermittent wiper interval is ten
seconds. The second intermittent wipe interval is based on vehicle speed. Rotate to the
third detent for low wiper operation and the
fourth detent for high wiper operation.
CAUTION!
Windshield Wiper Stalk
1 — Rear Wiper Operation
2 — Front Wiper Operation
• Always remove any buildup of snow that
prevents the windshield wiper blades
from returning to the “park” position. If
the windshield wiper switch is turned
off, and the blades cannot return to the
“park” position, damage to the wiper
motor may occur.
• Failure to follow these cautions can
cause damage to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of
the rear window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window. Use a soft
cloth and a mild washing solution,
wiping parallel to the heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners
on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance
from the window.
Washer Operation
Pull the lever rearward toward you and hold
for as long as spray is desired.
31
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield could lead to a collision. You might
not see other vehicles or other obstacles.
To avoid sudden icing of the windshield
during freezing weather, warm the windshield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Mist
Push the lever upward to the MIST position
and release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be
sprayed on the windshield. The wash function must be activated in order to spray the
windshield with washer fluid.
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped
This feature senses moisture on the windshield and automatically activates the wipers
for the driver. The feature is especially useful
for road splash or overspray from the wind-
32
shield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate
the end of the multifunction lever to one of
two settings to activate this feature.
The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the wiper blades and arms, and will
not operate under the following conditions:
Automatic Wiping
• Change In Ignition Position — If the vehicle
is in Rain Sensing mode and the ignition is
cycled from OFF to ON, the auto wiper will
be suppressed until vehicle speed is greater
than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the wiper switch is
moved out of and back into the Intermittent
wipe position.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted
with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay position one is the least sensitive, and wiper
delay position two is the most sensitive.
Place the wiper switch in the O (off) position
when not using the system.
NOTE:
• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper switch is in the low or
high-speed position.
• The Rain Sensing feature may not function
properly when ice or dried salt water is
present on the windshield.
• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or
silicone may reduce Rain Sensing performance.
• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on
and off using the Uconnect System, refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in
the Owner's Manual for further details.
• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — The
Rain Sensing system will not operate if the
NEUTRAL gear is selected in any speed
unless the wiper switch is moved or the
gear selector is moved out of NEUTRAL.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the
operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, Rain
Sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has
been selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned previously) exist.
Rear Wiper
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on
the windshield wiper/washer lever on the
right side of the steering column. The rear
wiper/washer is operated by rotating a switch,
located at the middle of the lever.
Rear Wiper Operation
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward
to the first detent for intermittent operation
and to the second detent for continuous rear
wiper operation.
Rear Washer Operation
Push the lever forward and hold while spray is
desired. Once the switch is released, it will
return to the OFF position and the wipers will
cycle several times before returning to the
parked position.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled
off after soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments,
or abrasive window cleaners on the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Climate Controls With A Touchscreen
Overview
The controls for the heating and air conditioning system in this vehicle can consist of a
series of outer rotary dials, inner push knobs,
and/or a touchscreen. These comfort controls
can be set to obtain desired interior conditions.
33
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
34
Uconnect 4/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
35
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Climate Controls Faceplate Buttons
36
Climate Controls Description
Icon
Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C Button in the touchscreen to change the current setting to the coldest output of air.
Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit.
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting, the indicator illuminates when A/C is ON.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen or push the button on the faceplate to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode.
NOTE:
• Recirculation can be used when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust or high humidity are present.
• Recirculation can be used on all modes except Defrost. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the
mode control selection.
• Continuous use of Recirculation mode may make the air inside the cabin stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use is not recommended.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this
function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
37
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon
Description
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost Button to change the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. Air comes from the
windshield and side window demist outlets when this feature is on. When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn ON the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors
(if equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after ten minutes.
Driver and Passenger Temperature Up and Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature
settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue
arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen (if equipped) or on the instrument panel (if equipped) to toggle the Sync
feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger temperature setting while in SYNC
will automatically exit this feature.
38
Icon
Faceplate Knobs
MODE
Touchscreen Buttons
Modes Button — If
Equipped
Panel Mode
Description
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected
using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The
blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
• Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower
setting. Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Modes Button
Push the button in the center of the Blower Control Knob to change the airflow distribution mode. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow
of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
39
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Icon
Bi-Level Mode
Description
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from
the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture
on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button to turn the Climate Controls off.
40
Climate Control Functions
MAX A/C
A/C (Air Conditioning)
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling performance. Press and release to toggle
between MAX A/C and the prior settings. The
button illuminates when MAX A/C is ON.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate
the air conditioning system. When the air
conditioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into
the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press
the A/C button to turn off the air conditioning
and manually adjust the blower and airflow
mode settings. Also, make sure to select only
Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.
NOTE:
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost mode and increase blower speed if needed.
• If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the
A/C condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from
the front of the radiator and through the
condenser.
Pressing blower speed, temperature, recirculation, or mode settings, will cause the MAX
A/C operation to switch to the selected setting and MAX A/C to exit.
Recirculation
When outside air contains smoke, odors, or
high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,
you may wish to recirculate interior air by
pressing the Recirculation control button.
The Recirculation indicator will illuminate
when this button is selected. Press the button
a second time to turn off the Recirculation
mode and allow outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE:
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode
may lead to excessive window fogging. The
Recirculation feature may be unavailable
(button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on
the inside of the windshield.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate,
or the AUTO button on the touchscreen (if
equipped) on the Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would
like the system to maintain by adjusting
the temperature control buttons. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the system achieves and automatically maintains
that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
41
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S.
or Metric units by selecting the US/Metric
customer-programmable feature.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan remains on low until the engine
warms up. The blower increases in speed and
transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of
manual override features. The AUTO symbol
in the front ATC display will be turned off
when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
Operating Tips
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
42
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster performance, make sure the engine
cooling system is functioning properly and
the proper amount, type, and concentration
of coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during Winter months is not recommended, because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for
about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear
the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use
the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of
the rear window. Do not use abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface
of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel
to the heating elements. Labels can be
peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from
the window.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions, such as leaves. Leaves collected in the
air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust
and pollen from the air. Contact an authorized dealer to service your cabin air filter,
and to have it replaced when needed.
WINDOWS
Power Window Controls
The window controls on the driver's door
control all the door windows.
There are single window controls on each
passenger door trim panel, which operate the
passenger door windows. The window controls will operate only when the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Uconnect, the
power window switches will remain active for
up to ten minutes after the ignition is cycled
to the OFF position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature. The time is programmable. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in
“Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for further information.
WARNING!
Power Window Switches
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do not leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
WARNING!
particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the windows while operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and the
passenger door power window switches have
an Auto-Down feature. Push the window
switch down, for a short period of time, and
release and the window will go down automatically.
To open the window part way, push the window switch down briefly and release it when
you want the window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way
down during the Auto-Down operation, pull
up on the switch briefly.
43
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch
Protection
NOTE:
• If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and
then go back down. Remove the obstacle
and use the window switch again to close
the window.
• Any impact due to rough road conditions
may trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the switch lightly and hold to
close the window manually.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands,
fingers and all objects from the window
path before closing.
44
Reset Auto-Up
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window probably needs to be reset. To reset
Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the
window completely and continue to hold
the switch up for an additional two seconds after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to
open the window completely and continue
to hold the switch down for an additional
two seconds after the window is fully
open.
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver's
door trim panel allows you to disable the
window controls on the rear passenger doors.
To disable the window controls, push and
release the window lockout button (the indicator light on the button with turn on). To
enable the window controls, push and release
the window lockout button again (the indicator light on the button will turn back off).
Window Lockout Switch
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in
certain open or partially open positions. This
is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, open the front and rear windows together to minimize the buffeting. If
the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
POWER SUNROOF — IF
EQUIPPED
sunroof open positions. The comfort stop
position has been optimized to minimize
wind buffeting.
The power sunroof switches are located on
the overhead console.
Push the switch and release it within one-half
second. The sunroof will open automatically
to the comfort stop position (if the sunshade
is in the closed position when the operation is
initiated the sunshade will automatically
open to the half open position prior to the
sunroof opening). Push the switch and release it again, the sunroof will open to the full
open position and automatically stop. This is
called “Express Open”. During Express Open
operation, any movement of the sunroof
switch will stop the sunroof.
Power Sunroof Switches
1 — Power Shade Switch
2 — Front Panel Open/Close Switch
3 — Front Panel Vent Switch
Opening
Opening Sunroof — Express
A comfort stop position and full open position
are the programmed automatic stops for the
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
A comfort stop position is a programmed
automatic stop for the sunroof open position.
The comfort stop position has been optimized
to minimize wind buffeting.
To open the sunroof, push and hold the
switch. The sunroof will stop automatically at
the comfort stop position (if the sunshade is
in the closed position when the operation is
initiated the sunshade will automatically
open to the half open position prior to the
sunroof opening). Push and hold the switch
again, the sunroof will open to the full open
position and automatically stop. Any release
of the switch will stop the movement. The
sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened condition until the switch is
pushed and held again.
Venting Sunroof — Express
Push and release the "Vent" button within
one-half second and the sunroof will move
from the closed position to the vent position.
This is called Express Vent. During Express
Vent operation, any movement of the switch
will stop the sunroof.
NOTE:
• If the sunshade is in the closed position
when the vent switch is pushed, the sunshade will automatically cycle to the halfway open position prior to the sunroof opening to the Vent position.
• When the sunroof is in a full open or a
partial open position, Express Vent operation is not available. You must push and
hold the vent switch to cycle the sunroof
45
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
from a slide open position to the vent position. Sunroof movement will stop if the
switch is released prior to the sunroof
reaching the vent position.
Closing
Closing Sunroof — Express
Pull the switch and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any position. The sunroof will close
fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close.” During Express Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, pull and hold the switch
in the close position. Any release of the
switch will stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed condition
until the sunroof switch is pulled again.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your ve-
46
hicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in
certain open or partially open positions. This
is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting.
If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,
adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
Power Sun Shade
Opening Power Shade — Express
Push the shade switch and release it within
one-half second and the shade will automatically open to the halfway position and stop
automatically. Push the switch a second time
from the halfway position and the shade will
automatically open to the full open position
and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express Open operation,
any movement of the shade switch will stop
the shade.
Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode
To open the shade, push and hold the switch.
The shade will open and stop automatically
at the half-open position. Push and hold the
shade switch again and the shade will open
automatically to the full-open position. Any
release of the switch will stop the movement
and the shade will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed
again.
Closing Power Shade — Express
Pull the switch and release it within one-half
second and the shade will close automatically from any position. If the sunroof is
completely closed the shade will close fully
and stop automatically. This is called “Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the shade.
NOTE:
If the sunroof is open, the shade will close to
the half-open position. Pulling the shade
close button again will automatically close
both the sunroof and shade completely.
Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode
To close the shade, pull and hold the switch
in the close position. Any release of the
switch will stop the movement and the shade
will remain in a partially closed condition
until the switch is pulled again.
Pinch Protection Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if
this occurs. Next, push the switch forward
and release to Express Close.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth
close attempt will be a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
WARNING!
• Do not let children play with the sunroof.
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
WARNING!
vehicle. Do not leave the key fob in or
near the vehicle, and do not leave the
ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the
power sunroof switch. Such entrapment
may result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of
being thrown from a vehicle with an
open sunroof. You could also be severely
injured or killed. Always fasten your seat
belt properly and make sure all passengers are properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate
the sunroof. Never allow your fingers,
other body parts, or any object to project
through the sunroof opening. Injury may
result.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft
cloth to clean the glass panel.
HOOD
Opening The Hood
Two latches must be released to open the
hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located underneath the driver’s side of the instrument
panel.
Hood Release Location
(Underneath Instrument Panel)
47
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle. The
safety latch release lever is located behind the front edge of the hood at the
center. Reach in at the center of the hood
with a palm facing the ground. Once contact is made with the safety latch release
lever, push it toward the passenger side of
the vehicle to fully release the hood.
WARNING!
latched, it could open when the vehicle is
in motion and block your vision. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam
the hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and drop the
hood to close. Make sure hood is fully
closed for both latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is fully closed, with both
latches engaged.
LIFTGATE
Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location
Closing The Hood
Opening
Liftgate Entry
NOTE:
Use the interior door lock/unlock button on
the door panel or the key fob to lock and
unlock the liftgate. The manual door locks on
the doors and the exterior door lock cylinder
will not lock and unlock the liftgate.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
WARNING!
The liftgate may be released by the overhead
console switch or the outside handle.
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
The overhead console switch will release the
liftgate when the liftgate is unlocked or
48
locked. The outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured
WARNING!
by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed
when you are operating the vehicle.
Closing
Grasp the liftgate pull handle and initiate
lowering the liftgate. Release the handle
when the liftgate reaches self closing position.
NOTE:
Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in
possession of the key because the liftgate
may be locked.
Power Liftgate — If Equipped
The power liftgate may be opened or
closed by the key fob, outside handle, overhead console switch, and the liftgate switch
on the upper left trim when the liftgate is
open.
Using any of the above ways:
• When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate
will open.
• When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate
will close.
• When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will
reverse.
The key fob and the overhead console switch
will open the liftgate when the liftgate is
locked. The outside handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked. Push the button on the
key fob twice within five seconds to open or
close the liftgate.
When the liftgate button on the key fob is
pushed two times, the turn signals will flash
twice to signal that the liftgate is opening or
closing (if Flash Lamps with Lock is enabled
in the Uconnect settings), and the liftgate
chime will be audible. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s
Manual for further information.
NOTE:
• Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be
in possession of the key because the liftgate may be locked.
• Use the interior door lock/unlock button on
the door panel or the key fob to lock and
unlock the liftgate. The manual door locks
on the doors and the exterior door lock
cylinder will not lock and unlock the
liftgate.
Lock The Vehicle
WARNING!
During power operation, personal injury or
cargo damage may occur. Ensure the liftgate travel path is clear. Make sure the
liftgate is closed and latched before driving away.
NOTE:
• The liftgate will not power open or close if
the gear selector is in gear or the vehicle
speed is above 0 mph (0 km/h).
• If anything obstructs the power liftgate
while it is closing or opening, the liftgate
will automatically reverse to the closed or
open position, provided it meets sufficient
resistance.
49
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
• There are pinch sensors attached to the
side of the liftgate opening. Light pressure
anywhere along these strips will cause the
liftgate to return to the open position.
• If the power liftgate encounters multiple
obstructions within the same cycle, the
system will automatically stop. If this occurs, the liftgate must be opened or closed
manually.
• The power liftgate will not operate in temperatures below −22° F (−30° C) or temperatures about 150° F (65° C). Be sure to
remove any buildup of snow or ice from the
liftgate before pushing any of the power
liftgate switches.
• If the liftgate is left open for an extended
period of time, the liftgate may need to be
closed manually to reset power liftgate
functionality.
• Gas props support the liftgate in the open
position. However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be
necessary to assist the props when opening
the liftgate in cold weather.
50
• Before driving off, check the instrument
cluster for a liftgate or door open message
or warning indicator. Failure to do this
could result in unintentionally leaving the
liftgate open while driving.
• If your liftgate is power closing and you put
the vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue to power close. However, vehicle
movement may result in a detection of an
obstruction.
• If the electronic liftgate release handle is
pushed with the power liftgate is opening,
the liftgate motor will disengage to allow
manual operation.
• If the electronic liftgate release handle is
pushed while the power liftgate is closing,
the liftgate will reverse to the full open
position.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured
by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed
when you are operating the vehicle.
WARNING!
• If you are required to drive with the
liftgate open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the climate control
blower switch is set at high speed. Do
not use the recirculation mode.
NOTE:
Allow the power system to open the liftgate.
Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may
activate the liftgate obstacle detection feature and stop the power operation or reverse
its direction.
WARNING!
Personal injury or cargo damage may occur
if caught in the path of the liftgate. Make
sure the liftgate path is clear before activating the liftgate.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Power Outlets
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt
(13 Amp) power outlets that can be used to
power cellular phones, small electronics and
other low powered electrical accessories. The
power outlets are labeled with either a “key”
or a “battery” symbol to indicate how the
outlet is powered. Power outlets labeled with
a “key” are powered when the ignition is in
the ON or ACC position, while the outlets
labeled with a “battery” are connected directly to the battery and powered at all times.
CAUTION!
of the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The front power outlet is located on the center stack of the instrument panel.
Rear Cargo Area Power Outlet
NOTE:
NOTE:
The rear cargo area power outlet can be
switched from “ignition” only to constant
“battery” powered all the time. See an authorized dealer for details.
• All accessories connected to the “battery”
powered outlets should be removed or
turned off when the vehicle is not in use to
protect the battery against discharge.
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object
in the power outlets as this will damage
the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use
Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there is
also a power outlet located in the rear cargo
area.
51
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this
type of outlet should be inserted into any
12 Volt outlet.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause
an electric shock and failure.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or long periods of the vehicle not
being started (with accessories still
plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the generator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
Power Inverter — If Equipped
52
To turn on the power inverter outlet, simply
plug in the device. The outlet automatically
turns off when the device is unplugged.
The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter
will automatically shut down. Once the electrical device has been removed from the
outlet the inverter should automatically reset. To avoid overloading the circuit, check
the power ratings on electrical devices prior
to using the inverter.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.)
will degrade the battery even more
quickly. Only use these intermittently
and with greater caution.
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet
located on the back of the center console to
convert DC current to AC current. This outlet
can power cellular phones, electronics and
other low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end game consoles
will exceed this power limit, as will most
power tools.
WARNING!
Power Inverter Location
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the
receptacles.
WARNING!
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may
cause an electric shock and failure.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF
EQUIPPED
The load carried on the roof, when equipped
with a luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs
(68 kg), and it should be uniformly distributed over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever
cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check the
straps frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
NOTE:
Crossbars can be purchased at your authorized dealer through Mopar parts.
External racks do not increase the total load
carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that
the total occupant and luggage load inside
the vehicle, plus the load on the luggage rack,
do not exceed the maximum vehicle load
capacity.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before
driving your vehicle. Improperly secured
loads can fly off the vehicle, particularly at
high speeds, resulting in personal injury or
property damage. Follow the roof rack cautions when carrying cargo on your roof
rack.
CAUTION!
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and
vehicle, do not exceed the maximum
roof rack load capacity. Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as possible
and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads, which extend over the windshield, such as wood panels or surfboards, should be secured to both the
front and rear of the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Place a blanket or other protection between the surface of the roof and the
load.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully when carrying large or
heavy loads on the roof rack. Wind
forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward
loads. This is especially true on large flat
loads and may result in damage to the
cargo or your vehicle.
• Load should always be secured to cross
bars first, with tie down loops used as
additional securing points if needed. Tie
loops are intended as supplementary tie
down points only. Do not use ratcheting
mechanisms with the tie loops. Check
the straps frequently to be sure that the
load remains securely attached.
53
54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
Oil Change Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .57
TRIP COMPUTER . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
WARNING LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Red Warning Lights . . .
Yellow Warning Lights .
Yellow Indicator Lights .
White Indicator Lights .
Green Indicator Lights .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.59
.62
.65
.67
.67
Blue Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Gray Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM — OBD II . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . .69
55
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instrument cluster display, which offers useful information to the driver. With the ignition in
the STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and
display the total miles, or kilometers, in the
odometer. Your instrument cluster display is
designed to display important information
about your vehicle’s systems and features.
Using a driver interactive display located on
the instrument panel, your instrument cluster display can show you how systems are
working and give you warnings when they
aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls
allow you to scroll through and enter the main
menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want and make selections and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls
The instrument cluster display features a
driver-interactive display that is located in
the instrument cluster.
56
The systems allow the driver to select information by pushing the following buttons
mounted on the steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Location
The instrument cluster display menu items
consist of the following as equipped:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
• Speedometer
• Vehicle Info
• Driver Assist
• Fuel Economy
• Trip
• Stop/Start (If Equipped)
• Audio
• Messages
• Screen Setup
• Vehicle Settings
• Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to
scroll upward through the main menu and
submenus.
• Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button to
scroll downward through the main menu
and submenus.
• Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
• Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
• Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time the ignition is cycled to
the ON/RUN position.
• To reset the oil change indicator after performing the scheduled maintenance, refer
to the following procedure.
Models Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition
• OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of
a main menu item. Push and hold the OK
button for one second to reset displayed/
selected features that can be reset.
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push
the ENGINE START/STOP button and
cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position
(do not start the engine).
Oil Change Reset
3. Cycle the ignition to the OFF/LOCK
position.
• Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Due” message will display in the instrument cluster display for five seconds after a
single chime has sounded, to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The
engine oil change indicator system is duty
cycle based, which means the engine oil
change interval may fluctuate, dependent
upon your personal driving style.
2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within ten seconds.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when
you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional
monitoring of the electrical system and status
of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system failure, or the vehicle battery conditions
are deteriorating, electrical load reduction
actions will take place to extend the driving
time and distance of the vehicle. This is done
by reducing power to or turning off nonessential electrical loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine
is running. It will display a message if there is
a risk of battery depletion to the point where
the vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical
supply, or will not restart after the current
drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message “Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver
Mode” will appear in the instrument cluster
display.
57
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
These messages indicate the vehicle battery
has a low state of charge and continues to
lose electrical charge at a rate that the charging system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
• The charging system is independent from
load reduction. The charging system performs a diagnostic on the charging system
continuously.
• If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it
may indicate a problem with the charging
system. Refer to “Battery Charge Warning
Light” in “Warning And Indicator Lights
And Messages” located in ”Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off
(if equipped), and vehicle functions which
can be effected by load reduction:
• Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
• Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
• Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
• HVAC System
• 150W Power Inverter System
58
• Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one
or more of the following conditions:
• The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system because the electrical loads are larger than
the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
• Turning on all possible vehicle electrical
loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior
and interior lights, overloaded power outlets +12V, 150W, USB ports) during certain
driving conditions (city driving, towing, frequent stopping).
• Installing options like additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems,
alarms and similar devices.
• Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated by long parking periods).
• The vehicle was parked for an extended
period of time (weeks, months).
• The battery was recently replaced and was
not charged completely.
• The battery was discharged by an electrical
load left on when the vehicle was parked.
• The battery was used for an extended period with the engine not running to supply
radio, lights, chargers, +12V portable appliances like vacuum cleaner’s, game consoles and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On”
or “Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
• Reduce power to unnecessary loads if possible:
– Turn off redundant lights (interior or
exterior)
– Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12V, 150W, USB ports
– Check HVAC settings (blower, temperature)
– Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
• Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical accessories, audio systems, alarms)
and review specifications if any (load and
Ignition Off Draw currents).
• Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
• The vehicle should have service performed
if the message is still present during consecutive trips and the evaluation of the
vehicle and driving pattern did not help to
identify the cause.
TRIP COMPUTER
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trip A or Trip B icon is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display (Toggle left or
right to select Trip A or Trip B). Push and
release the OK button to display the Trip
information.
WARNING LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated message and/or acoustic signal when
applicable. These indications are indicative
and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner’s
Manual, which you are advised to read carefully in all cases. Always refer to the information in this chapter in the event of a failure
indication. All active telltales will display first
if applicable. The system check menu may
appear different based upon equipment options and current vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
— Air Bag Warning Light
This light indicates a fault with the air bag,
and will turn on for four to eight seconds as a
bulb check when the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position. This light
will illuminate with a single chime when a
fault with the air bag has been detected, it
will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the
light is either not on during startup, stays on,
or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
— Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied,
that the brake fluid level is low, or that there
is a problem with the anti-lock brake system
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking
brake has been disengaged, and the fluid
level is at the full mark on the master cylinder
reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem
with the Brake Booster has been detected by
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
case, the light will remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is
related to the brake booster, the ABS pump
will run when applying the brake, and a brake
pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in
either half of the dual brake system is indi-
59
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
cated by the Brake Warning Light, which will
turn on when the brake fluid level in the
master cylinder has dropped below a specified level.
event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light.
Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from
the OFF position to the ON/RUN position.
The light should illuminate for approximately
two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake
fault is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected by your authorized dealer.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid
level conditions. The vehicle should have
service performed, and the brake fluid level
checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair
is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light
on is dangerous. Part of the brake system
may have failed. It will take longer to stop
the vehicle. You could have a collision.
Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the
60
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in
the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This light illuminates when the battery is not
charging properly. If it stays on while the
engine is running, there may be a malfunc-
tion with the charging system. Contact your
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
— Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
— Electric Power Steering Fault
Warning Light
This light will turn on when there's a fault
with the EPS (Electric Power Steering) system. Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting
And Operating” in the Owner’s Manual for
further information.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to inform of
a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a problem is detected
while the vehicle is running, the light will
either stay on or flash depending on the
nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition
when the vehicle is safely and completely
stopped and the transmission is placed in the
PARK position. The light should turn off. If
the light remains on with the vehicle running,
your vehicle will usually be drivable; however,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon
as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing. The
light will come on when the ignition is placed
in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position and
remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light
does not come on during starting, have the
system checked by an authorized dealer.
— Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine
condition. If the engine coolant temperature
is too high, this indicator will illuminate and a
single chime will sound. If the temperature
reaches the upper limit, a continuous chime
will be sound for four minutes or until the
engine is able to cool: whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull
over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is
on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call
for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further
information.
— Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood
is left open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
— Liftgate Open Warning Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on
while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off
the engine as soon as possible. A chime will
sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
61
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Oil Temperature Warning Light
This telltale indicates engine oil temperature
is high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as
soon as possible. Wait for oil temperature to
return to normal levels.
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This light indicates when the driver or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When the
ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the
light will turn on. When driving, if the driver
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or
remain on continuously and a chime will
sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
— Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with a
message in the instrument cluster display
and a buzzer) to indicate a transmission
fault. Contact your authorized dealer if the
message remains after restarting the engine.
62
— Transmission Temperature Warning
Light — If Equipped
— Vehicle Security Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light indicates high transmission fluid
temperature. This may occur with strenuous
usage such as trailer towing. If this light turns
on, stop the vehicle and run the engine at idle
or slightly faster, with the transmission in
PARK or NEUTRAL, until the light turns off.
Once the light turns off, you may continue to
drive normally.
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning
Light is illuminated you could cause the
fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot
engine or exhaust components and cause
a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated
will eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
Yellow Warning Lights
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning
Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is
required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, have the brake system inspected by an authorized dealer.
— Electronic Park Brake Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the Electronic Park Brake is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer.
— Fuel Cutoff Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate after an
accident has occurred, and the system has
shut the fuel off.
— LaneSense Warning Light — If
Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be solid
yellow when the vehicle is approaching a lane
marker. The warning light will flash when the
vehicle is crossing the lane marker.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
— Service LaneSense Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
LaneSense system is not operating and requires service. Please see an authorized dealer.
— Low Coolant Level Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle coolant level is low.
— Low Fuel Warning Light
Depending on whether the tank size is 51L or
60L, the Low Fuel Indicator Light will turn on
when the fuel level goes below 1.5 gal (5.6L)
or 1.7 gal (6.6L) respectively.
— Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.
— Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine
and automatic transmission control systems.
This warning light will illuminate when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position before
engine start. If the bulb does not come on
when turning the ignition switch from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate the light after engine start. The vehicle
should be serviced if the light stays on
through several typical driving styles. In most
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and
will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may
flash to alert serious conditions that could
lead to immediate loss of power or severe
catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this
occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal operating condi-
63
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
tions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc.
This could result in death or serious injury
to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the vehicle control system. It also
could affect fuel economy and driveability.
If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon
occur. Immediate service is required.
SERV
4WD
— Service 4WD Warning Light — If
Equipped
If the light stays on or comes on during
driving, it means that the 4WD system is not
functioning properly and that service is required. We recommend you drive to the nearest service center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.
64
— Service Forward Collision Warning
(FCW) Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate a fault in
the Forward Collision Warning System. Contact your local authorized dealer for service.
Refer to "Forward Collision Warning (FCW)" in
"Safety" for further information.
— Service Stop/Start System Warning
Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/
Start system is not functioning properly and
service is required. Contact your authorized
dealer for service.
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message
is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or
that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire in
sequence.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp
braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires
or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels.
TPMS pressures and warning have been
established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not
CAUTION!
of the same size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
your authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
— Towing Hook Breakdown Warning
Light — If Equipped
This light illuminates when there is a failure
with the tow hook. Contact your authorized
dealer for service.
Yellow Indicator Lights
— Active Speed Limiter Fault Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal
when there is a fault detected with the Active
Speed Limiter.
65
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator
Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN
position and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is
required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if
the brake warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to
restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If
the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition switch is placed in the ON/RUN
position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
— 4WD Low Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front
and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
66
together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Low range provides
a greater gear reduction ratio to provide increased torque at the wheels.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use.
— 4WD Lock Indicator Light
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the four-wheel drive LOCK mode. The front
and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
together, forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed.
Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Indicator Light
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position. It should go
out when the engine is running. If the “ESC
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with
the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and
the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon
as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the
“ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position.
• Each time the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position, the ESC system will be
ON, even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes
inactive following the maneuver that
caused the ESC activation.
This telltale indicates that an ESC event is
active.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped
— LaneSense Indicator Light — If
Equipped
— Speed Control SET Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) is off.
When the LaneSense system is ON, but not
armed, the LaneSense indicator is solid
white. This occurs when only left, right, or
neither lane line has been detected. If a
single lane line is detected, the system is
ready to provide only visual warnings if an
unintentional lane departure occurs on the
detected lane line.
This light will turn on when the speed control
is set. Refer to “Speed Control — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for
further information.
— Forward Collision Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to warn you of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front of
you.
— Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light indicates that Forward Collision
Warning is off.
— Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical
Alarm Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the vehicle
security alarm system has detected an attempt to break into the vehicle.
White Indicator Lights
— Cruise Control Ready Indicator
This light will turn on when the speed control
is ready, but not set.
Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in
“Starting And Operating” for further information.
— Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator shows when the Hill Descent
Control (HDC) feature is turned on. The lamp
will be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can
only be armed when the transfer case is in the
“4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed
is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these
conditions are not met while attempting to
use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light
will flash on/off.
— Active Speed Limiter ON Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Active Speed
Limiter is on, but not set.
Green Indicator Lights
— Active Speed Limiter SET Indicator
Light
This light will turn on when the Active Speed
Limiter is on and set to a specific speed.
— LaneSense Indicator Light — If
Equipped
The LaneSense indicator is solid green when
both lane markings have been detected and
the system is “armed” and ready to provide
visual and torque warnings if an uninten-
67
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
tional lane departure occurs. Refer to “LaneSense — If Equipped" in “Starting And Operating” for further information.
— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
park lights or headlights are turned on.
— Front Fog Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front
fog lights are on.
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn signal indicator will flash independently and the corresponding exterior turn
signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be
activated when the multifunction lever is
moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km)
with either turn signal on.
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb
if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
68
— Cruise Control Set Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
speed control is set to the desired speed.
Refer to “Speed Control” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
— Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
— Automatic High Beam Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This indicator shows that the automatic high
beam headlights are on.
Blue Indicator Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator shows that the high beam
headlights are on. With the low beams activated, push the multifunction lever forward
(toward the front of the vehicle) to turn on the
high beams. Pull the multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn
off the high beams. If the high beams are off,
pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.
Gray Indicator Lights
— Electronic Speed Control ON Indicator Light
This light will turn on when the electronic
speed control is ON.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II.
This system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and automatic transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide
excellent performance and fuel economy, as
well as emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the
OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diag-
nostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable
and not need towing, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
Authorized service technicians may need to
access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle
must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection
port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls.
• ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to diagnose or
service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected
to the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems,
could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access,
information stored in your vehicle
systems, including personal information.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION
AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass
could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this
check verifies the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning
and is not on when the engine is running, and
that the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready.
The OBD II system may not be ready if your
vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a
dead battery or a battery replacement. If the
OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail
the test.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity” in “Multimedia”.
69
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated
test, which you can use prior to going to the
test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will
have to start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of
two things will happen:
• The MIL will flash for about ten seconds
and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD
II system is not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
70
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine.
This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If
your vehicle was recently serviced or had a
battery failure or replacement, you may need
to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as
you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above
test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you
should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the
engine running.
SAFETY
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . .72
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . .72
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . .73
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS. . .81
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) . . . . .83
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . .85
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
Important Safety Precautions . . . . .
Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . .
Supplemental Restraint Systems
(SRS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . .127
Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . .130
. .91
. .91
. .92
.101
.115
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
71
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
• Brake pedal pulsations.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides
increased vehicle stability and brake performance under most braking conditions. The
system automatically prevents wheel lock,
and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS is working properly each
time the vehicle is started and driven. During
this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking
sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels begin to
lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow,
gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,
or panic stops may increase the likelihood of
ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when
ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to
run for a short time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
72
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible to interference caused by improperly installed or high output radio
transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of anti-lock
braking capability. Installation of such
equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may
lead to a collision. Pumping makes the
stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you
need to slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws
of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the
WARNING!
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires
or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner that could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM
tires. Modification may result in degraded
ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light”
will turn on when the ignition is turned to the
ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if
the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on,
the brake system should be serviced as soon
as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning
Light” does not come on when the ignition is
turned to the ON/RUN mode, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control system (EBC). This
system includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS),
Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems
work together to enhance both vehicle stability and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with
Ready Alert Braking (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Trailer Sway Control (TSC), and
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST).
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel
spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel
spin is detected, the TCS may apply brake
pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce vehicle power to provide enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature of the TCS,
Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions
similar to a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster
than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow
more vehicle torque to be applied to the
wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain
enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced
mode.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate
and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This
can help reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the anti-lock brake system
(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive
the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities
of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
73
SAFETY
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will
turn on when the ignition is turned to the
ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains
on or comes on while driving, it indicates that
the brake system is not functioning properly
and that immediate service is required. If the
“Brake System Warning Light” does not
come on when the ignition is turned to the
ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as
soon as possible.
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
Dynamic Steering Torque is a feature of the
ESC and Electric Power Steering (EPS) modules that provides torque at the steering
wheel for certain driving conditions in which
the ESC module is detecting vehicle instability. The torque that the steering wheel receives is only meant to help the driver realize
optimal steering behavior in order to reach/
74
maintain vehicle stability. The only notification the driver receives that the feature is
active is the torque applied to the steering
wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the
driver realize the correct course of action
through small torques on the steering wheel,
which means the effectiveness of the DST
feature is highly dependent on the driver’s
sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied
torque. It is very important to realize that this
feature will not steer the vehicle, meaning
the driver is still responsible for steering the
vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the
braking torque between the front and rear
axles by limiting braking pressure to the rear
axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the
rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for
wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering
wheel input and the speed of the vehicle.
When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially cause
wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving
maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due
to other factors, such as road conditions,
leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
other vehicles.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading,
road conditions and driving conditions,
influence the chance that wheel lift or
rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking
objects or other vehicles. The capabilities
WARNING!
of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and
stability of the vehicle under various driving
conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or
understeering of the vehicle by applying the
brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition. Engine power may also be reduced
to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the oversteer or understeer condition.
• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning
more than appropriate for the steering
wheel position.
• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning
less than appropriate for the steering wheel
position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” located in the instrument cluster will
start to flash as soon as the ESC system
becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when the TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on
the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
accidents, including those resulting
WARNING!
from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
ESC also cannot prevent accidents resulting from loss of vehicle control due
to inappropriate driver input for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly maintain your vehicle, may change
the handling characteristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect the performance of the ESC system. Changes to
the steering system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel
size may adversely affect ESC performance. Improperly inflated and unevenly worn tires may also degrade ESC
performance. Any vehicle modification
or poor vehicle maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC sys-
75
SAFETY
WARNING!
tem can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE:
Depending upon model and mode of operation, the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the
ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the
ESC system will be in this mode. This mode
should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for
specific reasons as noted in the following
paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times
when a more spirited driving experience is
desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for
more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the
ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC
Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
ESC OFF Button
76
NOTE:
When driving with snow chains, or when
starting off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it
may be desirable to allow more wheel spin.
This can be accomplished by momentarily
pushing the “ESC Off” button to enter partial
mode “Partial Off” mode. Once the situation
requiring “Partial Off” mode is overcome,
turn ESC back on by momentarily pushing
the “ESC Off” button. This may be done
while the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
functionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in the TCS
section), has been disabled and the
“ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the
engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered by the ESC system is reduced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled
when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” mode.
Full Off (Four-Wheel Drive Models Only)
This mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use when ESC stability features
could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to
trail conditions. This mode is entered by
pushing and holding the “ESC Off” switch for
five seconds when the vehicle is stopped and
the engine is running. After five seconds, the
"ESC OFF Indicator Light" will illuminate and
the “ESC OFF” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display.
In this mode, ESC and TCS, except for the
“limited slip” feature described in the TCS
section, are turned off until the vehicle
reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At
40 mph (64 km/h), the system returns to
“Partial Off” mode, as described above. TCS
remains off. When the vehicle speed drops
below 30 mph (48 km/h), the ESC system
shuts off. ESC is deactivated at low vehicle
speeds so that it will not interfere with offroad driving however, ESC function returns to
provide the stability feature at speeds above
40 mph (64 km/h). The "ESC OFF Indicator
Light" will always be illuminated when ESC is
off.
To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the
“ESC Off” switch. This will restore the “ESC
On” mode of operation.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
NOTE:
The “ESC OFF” message will display and an
audible chime will sound when the gear selector is placed into the PARK position from
any other position, and then moved out of the
PARK position. This will occur even if the
message was previously cleared.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster will come on when the
ignition is turned to the ON mode.
It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with
the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light
remains on after several ignition cycles, and
the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon
as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
WARNING!
In the "Full Off" mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled. In an emergency evasive maneuver,
the ESC system will not engage to assist in
maintaining stability. “ESC Off” mode is
intended for off-highway or off-road use
only.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” (located in the instrument cluster)
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC
Activation/Malfunction
Indicator
Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the
“ESC
Activation/Malfunction
Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration,
ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
77
SAFETY
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
NOTE:
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or
driver is actively overriding with brake or
throttle application).
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light”
come on momentarily each time the ignition is turned ON.
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the
ESC system will be on even if it was turned
off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes
inactive following the maneuver that
caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the customer has elected to
have the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) in a reduced mode.
78
HDC has three states:
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch,
but the following conditions must also be met
to enable HDC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.
Hill Descent Control (Trailhawk)
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in 4WD Low Range. HDC maintains
vehicle speed while descending hills during
various driving situations. HDC controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
• Vehicle speed is below 7.5 mph (12 km/h).
• Electric Park Brake (EPB) is released.
• Driver’s door is closed.
Activating HDC
Disabling HDC
Once HDC is enabled, it will activate automatically if driven down a grade of sufficient
magnitude (greater than approximately 8%).
The set speed for HDC is selectable by the
driver and can be adjusted within the thresholds by using throttle or brake application.
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any
of the following conditions occur:
Driver Override:
• Driver’s door opens.
The driver may override HDC activation speed
with throttle or brake application at anytime.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h) (HDC exits immediately.)
Deactivating HDC
Feedback To The Driver:
HDC will be deactivated but remain available
if any of the following conditions occur:
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and
the HDC switch has an LED which offer
feedback to the driver about the state HDC is
in.
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with a
speed exceeding 7.5 mph (12 km/h) but
remains below 25 mph (40 km/h).
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magnitude (less than approximately
8%), is on level ground, or is on an uphill
grade.
• Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
• The driver pushes the HDC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low
Range.
• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and remain solid when HDC is enabled or activated. This is the normal operating condition for HDC.
• The switch lamp will flash for several seconds then extinguish when the driver
pushes the HDC switch when enable conditions have not been met.
The Hill Descent Switch is located within the
Selec-Terrain knob in the upper right
position.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver must remain attentive
to the driving conditions and is responsible
for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll
back from a complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the brake while
stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If
the driver does not apply the throttle before
this time expires, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down
the hill as normal.
79
SAFETY
The following conditions must be met in
order for HSA to activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed.
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate
if the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
will remain active.
WARNING!
WARNING!
active driving involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive to
distance to other vehicles, people, and
objects, and most importantly brake operation to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your
complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an incline while resuming acceleration, manually activate the trailer
brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the
transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision or serious personal
injury.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate
roll back while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill
Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and
slight rolling may occur, such as on minor
hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while
pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
80
• If you use a trailer brake controller with
your trailer, the trailer brakes may be
activated and deactivated with the brake
switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle
and the trailer on a hill when the brake
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off.
To change the current setting, proceed as
follows:
• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings,
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further information.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support may improve braking
performance in wet conditions. It will periodically apply a small amount of brake pressure
to remove any water buildup on the front
brake rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When
Rain Brake Support is active, there is no
notification to the driver and no driver interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time
required to reach full braking during emergency braking situations. It anticipates when
an emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake
system for a panic stop.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize
an excessively swaying trailer and will take
the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the
sway. TSC will become active automatically
once an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will
flash, the engine power may be reduced and
you may feel the brakes being applied to
individual wheels to attempt to stop the
trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” or “Full
Off” modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the
vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe
location, and adjust the trailer load to
eliminate trailer sway.
AUXILIARY DRIVING
SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system
uses two radar-based sensors, located inside
the rear bumper fascia, to detect highway
licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles etc.) that enter the blind spot zones
from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately one lane width on both sides of the
vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone length starts
at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear
bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system
monitors the detection zones on both sides of
the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and
will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
81
SAFETY
and the vehicle is in REVERSE, the driver is
alerted using both the visual and audible
alarms, including reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Blind Spot Monitoring” in “Safety” in
the Owner's Manual for further information.
Modes Of Operation
Rear Detection Zones
BSM Warning Light
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning
light will momentarily illuminate in both outside rear view mirrors to let the driver know
that the system is operational. The BSM
system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear or REVERSE and enters
stand by mode when the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM system can also be configured to
sound an audible (chime) alert and mute the
radio to notify you of objects that have entered the detection zones.
The BSM warning light, located in the outside mirrors, will illuminate if a vehicle
moves into a blind spot zone.
82
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where the vision of oncoming
vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly and
cautiously out of the parking space until the
rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The RCP
system will then have a clear view of the cross
traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is detected, will alert the driver. When RCP is on
Three selectable modes of operation are
available in the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the
Owner's Manual for further details.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and
audible alerts when a detected object is present. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
Blind Spot Alert Off
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal
is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an
audible chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and detected object are
present on the same side at the same time,
both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert, the
radio (if on) will also be muted.
When the BSM system is turned off, there will
be no visual or audible alerts from either the
BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
an audible alert is requested, the radio is also
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each
time the vehicle is started the previously
stored mode will be recalled and used.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada licenseexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system
with mitigation provides the driver with audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a
brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and
limited braking are intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward looking sensors as well as the Electronic
Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a forward collision. When the system determines that a forward collision is
probable, the driver will be provided with
audible and visual warnings and may provide
a brake jerk warning.
83
SAFETY
Turning FCW On Or Off
Far
The forward collision menu setting is located
in the Uconnect settings. There are three
settings to choose from:
Changing the FCW status to the “Far” setting
allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front
using audible and visual warnings when the
latter is at a farther distance than the “Medium” setting.
• Off
• Warning Only
• Warning + Braking
NOTE:
• The default status of FCW is “on”, this
allows the system to warn you of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front of you.
• Changing the FCW status to “off” prevents
the system from warning you of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front of you. If
FCW is set to “off”, “FCW OFF” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Changing FCW Status
The FCW feature has three sensitivity settings and can be changed within the
Uconnect System Screen:
• Far
• Medium
• Near
84
More cautious drivers that do not mind frequent warnings may prefer this setting.
NOTE:
This setting gives you the most reaction time.
Medium
The default status of FCW is the “Medium”
setting and the Active Braking is in the “on”
setting. This allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
Near
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting, allows the system to warn you of a
potential frontal collision when you are much
closer.
This setting provides less reaction time than
the “Far” setting, which allows for a more
dynamic driving experience.
More dynamic or aggressive drivers that want
to avoid frequent warnings may prefer this
setting.
NOTE:
Changing the Warning + Braking status to
“off” prevents the system from providing autonomous braking, or additional brake support if the driver is not braking adequately in
the event of a potential frontal collision. The
Warning + Braking option can be turned “off”
in the Uconnect controls settings.
Refer to your Owner's Manual for further
details.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own,
nor can FCW detect every type of potential
collision. The driver has the responsibility
to avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via braking and steering. Failure to
WARNING!
follow this warning could lead to serious
injury or death.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada licenseexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the vehicle recommended cold
placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature
by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(6.5°C). This means that when the outside
temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle
has not been driven for at least three hours, or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also
increase as the vehicle is driven. This is
normal and there should be no adjustment for
this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the
low-pressure warning limit for any reason,
including low temperature effects and natural pressure loss through the tire. The TPMS
will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and
will not turn off until the tire pressure is at or
above the recommended cold placard pressure.
NOTE:
Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light) illuminates, you must increase the tire pressure
to the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light to turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light off.
The system will automatically update and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will turn off once the system receives
the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may
85
SAFETY
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa).
If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi
(193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C)
will decrease the tire pressure to approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is
low enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to
approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will still be on. In this situation, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will turn off only after the tires are inflated to
the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold plac-
86
ard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light off.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels.
TPMS pressures and warning have been
established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. The
TPM sensor is not designed for use on
aftermarket wheels and may contribute
to a poor overall system performance or
sensor damage. Customers are encouraged to use OEM wheels to assure
proper TPM feature operation.
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to your authorized dealer to
have your sensor function checked.
CAUTION!
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire
pressure always reinstall the valve stem
cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt
from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care and maintenance, or to provide warning of a tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire
pressure gauge while adjusting your tire
pressure.
• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure
using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even
if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor
the actual tire pressure in the tire.
Base System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check
the tire pressure in all of the tires on your
vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper
pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster, a “LOW TIRE
PRESSURE” message will display in the instrument cluster and a chime will sound
when tire pressure is low in one or more of the
four active road tires. Should this occur, you
should stop as soon as possible, check the
inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,
and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. Once
the system receives the updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update
and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light off. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
When a system fault is detected, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid. The system fault will also
sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled, this
sequence will repeat, providing the system
fault still exists. The Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light will turn off when the
fault condition no longer exists. A system
fault can occur due to any of the following:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same
radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
87
SAFETY
Vehicles With Compact Spare or non-Matching
Full Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching
full size spare tire does not have a tire
pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore,
the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in
the spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or nonmatching full size spare tire in place of a
road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, a chime will
sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light” and “LOW TIRE
PRESSURE” message will turn on upon
the next ignition cycle.
5. Once you repair or replace the original
road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in
place of the compact spare or nonmatching full size spare, the TPMS will
update automatically and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will turn off, as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in
any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
Premium System — If Equipped
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a
chime will sound and the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check
the tire pressure in all of the tires on your
vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper
pressure.
88
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which will display in the instrument cluster display.
• Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will
sound when tire pressure is low in one or
more of the four active road tires. In addition,
the instrument cluster will display a "Tire
Low" message, an “Inflate to XX” message,
and a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values
highlighted or in a different color.
nal color, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light will turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light off. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
SERVICE TPMS Warning
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warning
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with low pressure (those highlighted or in a different color
in the instrument cluster display graphic) to
the vehicle’s recommended cold placard
pressure value, as shown in the “Inflate to
XX” message. Once the system receives the
updated tire pressures, the system will automatically update, the pressure values in the
graphic display in the instrument cluster will
stop being highlighted or return to their origi-
When a system fault is detected, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid. The system fault will also
sound a chime. In addition, the instrument
cluster will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for a minimum of five seconds
and then display dashes (- -) in place of the
pressure value to indicate which sensor is not
being received.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence
will repeat, providing the system fault still
exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will no longer flash, and the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message will no longer display, and a pressure value will display in
place of the dashes. A system fault can occur
due to any of the following:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to facilities emitting the same
radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching
Full Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching
full size does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
will not monitor the pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or nonmatching full size spare tire in place of a
89
SAFETY
road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, upon the next
ignition key cycle, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will remain
on and a chime will sound. In addition,
the graphic in the instrument cluster will
still display a different color or highlighted pressure value and the “Inflate to
XX” message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place
of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
chime will sound, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on solid, and the instrument cluster will
display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
90
5. Once you repair or replace the original
road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in
place of the compact spare or nonmatching full size, the TPMS will update
automatically. In addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will turn off and the graphic in the instrument cluster will display a new pressure
value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no
tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road
tires. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all
four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires)
with wheel and tire assemblies that do not
have TPMS Sensors, such as when installing
winter wheel and tire assemblies on your
vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with
tires not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle
for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will flash on and off
for 75 seconds and then remain on. The
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the
TPMS will no longer chime or display the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message in the
instrument cluster but dashes (--) will remain
in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with
tires equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive
the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds and
then turn off. The instrument cluster will
display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then display pressure values in
place of the dashes. On the next ignition
cycle the "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message
will no longer be displayed as long as no
system fault exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada licenseexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying
air bag:
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of
a vehicle with a rear seat.
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information
in this section. It tells you how to use your
restraint system properly, to keep you and
your passengers as safe as possible.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in
the front passenger seat, move the seat as
far back as possible and use the proper
child restraint (refer to “Child Restraints”
in this section for further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear
the vehicle seat belt properly (refer to
“Child Restraints” in this section for further information) should be secured in the
rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat in
child restraints or belt-positioning booster
seats. Older children who do not use child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled up in the rear
seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
91
SAFETY
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats
should be moved back as far as practical
to allow the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air bags will inflate
forcefully into the space between occupants and the door and occupants could
be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs
to be modified to accommodate a disabled person, refer to the “Customer Assistance” section for customer service
contact information.
92
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the
road may be a poor driver and could cause a
collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save
lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of
injuries in a collision. Some of the worst
injuries happen when people are thrown from
the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by
striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in
a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
the driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
Belt Alert feature is active whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If
the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on
and remain on until both outboard front seat
belts are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is unbuckled (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard
front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking
the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding
an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert
warning sequence has completed, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the
seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed
until the driver and occupied outboard front
seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The
driver should instruct all occupants to buckle
their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while
the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert
is not active when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be
triggered when an animal or other items are
placed on the outboard front passenger seat
or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It
is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by
your authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger
seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat
belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat
belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking
the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out
of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The
air bags work with your seat belt to
restrain you properly. In some collisions,
the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers
can suffer much greater injuries if you
are not properly buckled up. You can
strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of
93
SAFETY
WARNING!
•
•
•
•
the vehicle. Always be sure you and
others in your vehicle are buckled up
properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly. Occupants, including the driver, should always wear their seat belts whether or not
an air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a
crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries,
or you could even slide out of the seat
belt. Follow these instructions to wear
94
WARNING!
WARNING!
your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together
can crash into one another in a collision,
hurting one another badly. Never use a
lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their
size.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The
lap portion could ride too high on your
body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not
protect you properly. In a sudden stop,
you could move too far forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your
seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A
seat belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as
shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest
bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will
not protect you from injury during a
collision. You are more likely to hit your
head in a collision if you do not wear
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and
pelvic bones, but across your abdomen.
Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut
into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat
against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
WARNING!
your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder
belt are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart
in a collision and leave you with no
protection. Inspect the seat belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble
or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a
collision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in
the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a
rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull
out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up
the webbing as far as necessary to allow
the seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
1 — Belt Buckle
2 — Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red
button on the buckle. The seat belt will
automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to
retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a
twisted lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm)
above the latch plate, grasp and twist the
seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the
latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the
folded webbing. The folded webbing must
enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.
95
SAFETY
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat
belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the
top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the seat belt
away from your neck. Push or squeeze the
anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average,
you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in
a lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it
up or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries,
or you could even slide out of the seat
belt. Follow these instructions to wear
Adjustable Anchorage
96
WARNING!
your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety
belt in a crash.
Second Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions
The second row center seat belt may feature
a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and
buckle. The mini-latch plate and buckle, if
equipped, should remain connected at all
times. If the mini-latch plate and buckle
become disconnected, they must be properly
reconnected prior to the rear center seat belt
being used by an occupant.
1. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the
seat belt over the seat.
Inserting Mini-Latch Plate Into
Mini-Buckle
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
1 — Seat Belt Buckle
2 — Seat Belt Latch Plate
2. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the mini-latch plate into the minibuckle until you hear a “click.”
1 — Mini-Latch Plate
2 — Mini-Buckle
3. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch
plate up the webbing as far as necessary
to allow the seat belt to go around your
lap.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
5. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on
the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the
risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
97
SAFETY
6. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so
that it is comfortable and not resting on
your neck. The retractor will withdraw any
slack in the seat belt.
7. To release the seat belt, push the red
button on the buckle.
8. To disengage the mini-latch plate from
the mini-buckle, insert the regular latch
plate into the center red slot on the minibuckle.
WARNING!
• If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle
are not properly connected when the
seat belt is used by an occupant, the
seat belt will not be able to provide
proper restraint and will increase the
risk of injury in a collision.
• When reattaching the mini-latch plate
and mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt
webbing is not twisted. If the webbing is
twisted, follow the preceding procedure
to detach the mini-latch plate and minibuckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the mini-latch plate and minibuckle.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and
the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
(if equipped) is in its lowest position, your
authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt
Tongue
98
be used only if the existing seat belt is not
long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is
not required for a different occupant, it must
be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is
physically required in order to properly
fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT
USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when
worn, the distance between the front
edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle
and the center of the occupant’s body is
LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not
needed can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision. Only use
the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt
is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Remove and store the Seat Belt Extender
when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event
of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury
in the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the
arm.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The
seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly.
a collision. The seat belt system has a retractor assembly that is designed to release webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used
to secure a child restraint system. For additional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child Restraints” section of this
manual. The figure below illustrates the locking feature for each seating position.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air
bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with
an Energy Management feature that may help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
99
SAFETY
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal
usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far
enough to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate the
ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow
the webbing to retract completely in this case
and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
"click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder
belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat
belt will still retract to remove any slack in
the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in
a seating position that has a seat belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under
should always be properly restrained in the
rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
100
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the seat belt is now
in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced
if the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat
belt function is not working properly
when checked according to the procedures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode
to restrain occupants who are wearing
the seat belt or children who are using
booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forwardfacing child restraints that have a harness for restraining the child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask your authorized dealer.
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
The air bag system must be ready to protect
you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with the electrical Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
The ORC monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the START or
ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in
the OFF position or in the ACC position, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will
not inflate.
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system
even if the battery loses power or it becomes
disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light
in the instrument panel for approximately
four to eight seconds for a self-check when
the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN
position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects
a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag
Warning Light if a malfunction is detected
that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the
malfunction. While the air bag system is
designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come
on during the four to eight seconds when
the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN
position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine related gauges are not working, the Oc-
101
SAFETY
cupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also
be disabled. In this condition the air bags
may not be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an authorized dealer service the
air bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t
have the air bag system to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first
turned on, stays on after you start the
vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have
an authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the
instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will stay on until the fault is
cleared. In addition, a single chime will
102
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has
been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately. For
additional information regarding the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” section of
this manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/
shoulder belts for both the driver and front
passenger. The front air bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint systems. The
driver front air bag is mounted in the center
of the steering wheel. The passenger front air
bag is mounted in the instrument panel,
above the glove compartment. The words
“SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed
on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air
Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
WARNING!
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to
the severity and type of collision as determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC), which may receive information from
the front impact sensors (if equipped) or
other system components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in
less severe collisions. A higher energy output
is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver
and/or front passenger seat belt buckle
switch that detects whether the driver or front
passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver
and/or front passenger seat track position
sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat
position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front
passenger Occupant Classification System
(“OCS”) that is designed to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air
bag to inflate.
WARNING!
• Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them
manually. You may damage the air bags
and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The
protective covers for the air bag cushions
are designed to open only when the air
bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The
air bags work with your seat belt to
restrain you properly. In some collisions,
air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to
reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not
deploy in all frontal collisions, including
103
SAFETY
some that may produce substantial vehicle
damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type
and location of impact, front air bags may
deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end
damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help
keep you in position, away from an inflating
air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring
the front air bags, it signals the inflator units.
A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated
to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air
bags inflate to their full size. The front air
104
bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The front air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the
driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated
safety system for this vehicle. It is designed
to provide Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
output appropriate to the occupant’s seated
weight, as determined by the OCS.
uses input from the Sensor to determine the
front passenger’s most probable classification. The OCM communicates this information to the ORC. The ORC may reduce the
inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag deployment based on occupant
classification. In order for the OCS to operate
as designed, it is important for the front
passenger to be seated properly and properly
wearing the seat belt.
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS
may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates that:
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
Sensor located in the front passenger seat
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or
has very light objects on it; or
• Air Bag Warning Light
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a
small passenger, including a child; or
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
consists of the following:
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And
Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
is located underneath the front passenger
seat. The Sensor is located beneath the passenger seat cushion foam. Any weight on the
seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a
rear-facing child restraint; or
• The front passenger is not properly seated
or his or her weight is taken off of the seat
for a period of time.
Front Passenger Seat
Occupant Status
Rear-facing child restraint
Child, including a
child in a forwardfacing child restraint
or booster seat*
Properly seated adult
Unoccupied seat
Front Passenger Air
Bag Output
Reduced-power deployment
Reduced-power deployment OR Fullpower deployment
Full-power deployment OR reducedpower deployment
Reduced-power deployment
* It is possible for a child to be classified as
an adult, allowing a full-power Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Never
allow children to ride in the front passenger
seat and never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in
the front passenger seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or
WARNING!
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
• Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s
most probable classification. The OCS estimates the seated weight on the front passenger seat and where that weight is located. The
OCS communicates the classification status
to the ORC. The ORC uses the classification
to determine whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation rate should be
adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it
is important for the front passenger to be
seated properly and properly wearing the seat
belt. Properly seated passengers are:
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their
feet comfortably on or near the floor
• Sitting with their back against the seatback
and the seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small
Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a
small adult, occupies the front passenger
seat, the OCS may reduce the inflation rate of
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. This
does not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
• Sitting upright
• Facing forward
105
SAFETY
Do not decrease OR increase the front passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be
properly positioned on the front passenger
seat. Failure to do so may result in serious
injury or death. The OCS determines the most
probable classification of the occupant that it
detects. The OCS will detect the front passenger’s decreased or increased seated
weight, which may result in an adjusted inflation rate of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that
the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing
the front passenger’s seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in a reducedpower deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing the front
passenger’s seated weight on the front passenger seat may result in a full-power deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating include:
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred
to another part of the vehicle (like the door,
arm rest or instrument panel).
106
• The front passenger leans forward, sideways, or turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the
full upright position.
• The front passenger carries or holds an
object while seated (e.g., backpack, box,
etc.).
• Objects are lodged under the front passenger seat.
Not Seated Properly
• Objects are lodged between the front passenger seat and center console.
• Accessories that may change the seated
weight on the front passenger seat are attached to the front passenger seat.
• Anything that may decrease or increase the
front passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s
most probable classification. If an occupant
in the front passenger seat is seated improperly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the
occupant’s properly seated weight input, for
example:
Not Seated Properly
WARNING!
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
• If a child restraint system, child, small
teenager or adult in the front passenger
seat is seated improperly, the occupant
may provide an output signal to the OCS
that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a
collision.
• Always wear your seat belt and sit properly, with the seatback in an upright
position, your back against the seatback, sitting upright, facing forward, in
the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g.,
backpacks, boxes, etc.) while seated in
the front passenger seat. Holding an
object may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different than the occupant’s properly seated weight input,
which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision.
• Placing an object on the floor under the
front passenger seat may prevent the
WARNING!
OCS from working properly, which may
result in serious injury or death in a
collision. Do not place any objects on the
floor under the front passenger seat.
The Air Bag Warning Light
in the instrument panel will turn on whenever the OCS is
unable to classify the front passenger seat
status. A malfunction in the OCS may affect
the operation of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light
does not
come on, or stays on after you start the
vehicle, or it comes on as you drive, take the
vehicle to your authorized dealer for service
immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical OCS components that may affect the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation.
In order for the OCS to properly classify the
seated weight of a front seat passenger, the
OCS components must function as designed.
Do not make any modifications to the front
passenger seat components, assembly, or to
the seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or
107
SAFETY
cushion needs service for any reason, take
the vehicle to an authorized dealer. Only FCA
US LLC approved seat accessories may be
used.
The following requirements must be strictly
followed:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat
assembly or components in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat
covers or cushions not designated by FCA
US LLC for the specific model being repaired. Always use the correct seat cover
and cushion specified for the vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion
with an aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
• At no time should any Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS
related component or fastener be modified
or replaced with any part except those
which are approved by FCA US LLC.
108
WARNING!
WARNING!
• Unapproved modifications or service
procedures to the passenger seat assembly, its related components, seat cover
or cushion may inadvertently change the
air bag deployment in case of a frontal
collision. This could result in death or
serious injury to the front passenger if
the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CMVSS).
• If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities,
contact your authorized dealer.
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the
knee impact bolsters such as alarm
lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument panel below the steering column. The
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection during a frontal impact
by working together with the seat belts, pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with a
“SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” label sewn into
the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts,
in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim
cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the
seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very
high speed and with such a high force that it
could injure occupants if they are not seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs) are located above the side
windows. The trim covering the SABICs is
labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air
Bags; the performance could be adversely
affected and/or objects could be pushed
into you, causing serious injury.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side
Air Bag
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable
Curtain (SABIC) Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to the injury reduction potential provided
by the seat belts and body structure.
109
SAFETY
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the
side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the
outside edge of the headliner out of the way
and covers the window. The SABICs inflate
with enough force to injure occupants if they
are not belted and seated properly, or if items
are positioned in the area where the SABICs
inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of
partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain side
impact events.
WARNING!
• Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage or other cargo up high enough to
block the deployment of the SABICs.
The trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are located should remain
free from any obstructions.
• In order for the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any accessory
items in your vehicle which could alter
110
WARNING!
the roof. Do not add an aftermarket
sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof
racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the
roof of the vehicle for any reason.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the appropriate response to impact events. The
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air
Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during
impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant
protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
deploy independently; a left side impact deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a rightside impact deploys the right Side Air Bags
only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags
should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain angles, or some side collisions that do
not impact the area of the passenger compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy
during angled or offset frontal collisions
where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in
less time than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags
can be seriously injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should never
lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the side air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or
child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your pro-
WARNING!
tection in all collisions. They also help
keep you in position, away from an inflating Side Air Bag. To get the best
protection from the Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their seat belts properly
and sit upright with their backs against
the seats. Children must be properly
restrained in a child restraint or booster
seat that is appropriate for the size of the
child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do
not lean against the door or window. Sit
upright in the center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags
during deployment could cause you to
be severely injured or killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air Bags work with your
seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
WARNING!
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
Rollover Events
ment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate, the
rollover sensing system will also deploy the
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the
vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of
partial or complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in certain rollover or side impact events.
Air Bag System Components
Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain rollover events. The ORC determines
whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags
in a particular rollover event is appropriate,
based on the severity and type of collision.
Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags should
have deployed.
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and interconnecting wiring associated with electrical Air
Bag System Components listed below:
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all
rollover events. The rollover sensing system
determines if a rollover event may be in
progress and whether deployment is appropriate. In the event the vehicle experiences a
rollover or near rollover event, and deploy-
• Instrument Panel
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Supplemental Knee Air Bags
111
SAFETY
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in
all collisions. This does not mean something
is wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the
air bags, any or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags deploy and unfold.
The abrasions are similar to friction rope
burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not
caused by contact with chemicals. They are
not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor immediately.
112
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you
have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area
with cool water. For nose or throat irritation,
move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags
have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot protect you in another collision. Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized
dealer immediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller System serviced
as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air
bag deployment.
• After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication network remains intact, and the power
remains intact, depending on the nature of
the event, the ORC will determine whether to
have the Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor
(If Equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery
has power
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for 15
minutes from the intervention of the Enhanced Accident Response System.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to
the Enhanced Accident Response System:
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door
• Cut
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the
ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position
and remove the key from the ignition switch
to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check
the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting
the system and starting the engine. If there
are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle
electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an
accident, reset the system by following the
procedure described below.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
After the event occurs, when the system is
active, a message regarding fuel cutoff is
displayed. Turn the ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the
vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting
the system and starting the engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left
and right turn signal lights, located in the
instrument panel, may both be blinking and
will continue to blink. In order to move your
vehicle to the side of the road, you must
follow the system reset procedure.
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two
seconds
1. Turn ignition
STOP/OFF/LOCK.
(Turn Signal Switch
Must be placed in
Neutral State).
Right turn light
2. Turn ignition MAR/
BLINKS.
ACC/ON/RUN.
Left turn light is OFF.
Right turn light is ON
3. Turn right turn
SOLID.
signal switch ON.
Left turn light
BLINKS.
Right turn light is
4. Place turn signal
OFF.
in neutral state.
Left turn light
BLINKS.
Right turn light
5. Turn left turn sig- BLINKS.
nal switch ON.
Left turn light is ON
SOLID.
Right turn light
6. Place turn signal
BLINKS.
in neutral state.
Left turn light is OFF.
113
SAFETY
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two
seconds
Right turn light is ON
7. Turn right turn
SOLID.
signal switch ON.
Left turn light
BLINKS.
Right turn light is
8. Place turn signal
OFF.
in neutral state.
Left turn light
BLINKS.
Right turn light is ON
9. Turn left turn sig- SOLID.
nal switch ON.
Left turn light is ON
SOLID.
10. Turn left turn
signal switch OFF.
Right turn light is
(Turn Signal Switch
OFF.
Must be placed in
Left turn light is OFF.
Neutral State).
11. Turn ignition
STOP/OFF/LOCK.
114
Customer Action
Customer Will See
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two
seconds
12. Turn ignition
MAR/ACC/ON/RUN.
(Entire sequence
System is now reset
needs to be comand the engine may
pleted within one
be started.
minute or sequence
will need to be repeated).
Turn hazard flashers
OFF (Manually).
If a reset procedure step is not completed
within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights
will blink and the reset procedure must be
performed again in order to be successful.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you
need it. You could be injured if the air
bag system is not there to protect you.
Do not modify the components or wiring,
including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim
cover or the upper right side of the
instrument panel. Do not modify the
front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running
boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to
tell anyone who works on your vehicle
that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate
accidentally or may not function properly if modifications are made. Take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your trim cover and cushion,
WARNING!
needs to be serviced in any way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle
to your authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air
bag system for persons with disabilities,
contact your authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically
30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if
a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
are recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data
with the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled
up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United States, and
every Canadian province, requires that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for
ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on
your lap could become so great that you
could not hold the child, no matter how
strong you are. The child and others could
115
SAFETY
WARNING!
be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of restraints for children from newborn size to the
child almost large enough for an adult safety
belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow
all the instructions and warnings in the child
restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached to the child restraint.
NOTE:
Before buying any restraint system, make
sure that it has a label certifying that it meets
all applicable Safety Standards. You should
also make sure that you can install it in the
vehicle where you will use it.
• Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
• For additional information, refer
www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm
call: 1–888–327–4236
to
or
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
116
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age
Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Children who are two years old or younger and
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
who have not reached the height or weight limRestraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of
its of their child restraint
the vehicle
Children who are at least two years old or who
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a fivehave outgrown the height or weight limit of
point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat
their rear-facing child restraint
of the vehicle
Children who have outgrown their forwardBelt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
facing child restraint, but are too small to propseat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
erly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who have
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
vehicle
booster seat
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two
years old or until they reach either the height
or weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be
used rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in
the vehicle. It is recommended for children
from birth until they reach the weight or
height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible
child seats often have a higher weight limit in
the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant carrier
but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by
their convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rearfacing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child
seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years
old or who have outgrown the rear-facing
weight or height limit of their rear-facing
convertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the
highest weight or height allowed by the child
seat.
All children whose weight or height is above
the forward-facing limit for the child seat
should use a belt-positioning booster seat
until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If
the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back
is against the seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the
vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure
of an infant or child restraint. It could
come loose in a collision. The child
could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can
loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before adjusting the vehicle seat position. When
117
SAFETY
WARNING!
the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt
or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from
the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the
vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks
and cause serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use
this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
118
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably
over the front of the vehicle seat – while
the child is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s thighs and
not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no,” then the child still needs to use a
booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is
using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt
fit periodically and make sure the seat belt
buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the
vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the
seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a
crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a
child properly, which may result in serious
injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the
seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Rear-Facing Child Re- Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
straint
Rear-Facing Child ReMore than 65 lbs
straint
(29.5 kg)
Forward-Facing Child
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Restraint
Forward-Facing Child
More than 65 lbs
Restraint
(29.5 kg)
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower Anchors
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower Anchors Seat Belt + Top Tether
Only
+ Top Tether Anchor
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
119
SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH,
which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower
anchorages located at the back of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to
install LATCH-equipped child seats without
using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating
positions may have a top tether anchorage
but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the
top tether anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
combined weight of the child and the child
weight of the child restraint) for using the
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
LATCH anchorage system to attach the child
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system
restraint?
once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
120
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearCan the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt
facing or forward-facing child restraint.
be used together to attach a rear-facing or
No
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
forward-facing child restraint?
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s
manual for more information.
You can install child restraints with flexible
lower anchors in the center position. The inner
Can a child seat be installed in the center posiYes
anchorages are 16 inches (400 mm) apart. Do
tion using the inner LATCH lower anchorages?
not install child restraints with rigid lower anchors in the center position.
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position
Can two child restraints be attached using a
does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorNo
common lower LATCH anchorage?
ages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in
the center position next to a child seat using
the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the front
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
passenger seat if the child restraint manufacYes
back of the front passenger seat?
turer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s manual for more information.
The head restraints may be removed in every
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
rear seating position.
121
SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback, below the anchorage
symbols on the seatback. They are just visible
when you lean into the rear seat to install the
child restraint. You will easily feel them if you
run your finger along the gap between the
seatback and seat cushion.
There are tether strap anchorages behind
each rear seating position located on the
back of the seat.
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to
the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower
attachments in the center seating position.
Only install this type of child restraint in the
outboard seating positions. Child restraints
with flexible, webbing mounted lower attachments can be installed in any rear seating
position.
WARNING!
Tether Anchors
Lower Anchorage Locations
122
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems
will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible
strap on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints
and some rear-facing child restraints will also
be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. If you
are installing LATCH-compatible child restraints next to each other, you must use
the seat belt for the center position. You
can then use either the LATCH anchors or
the vehicle’s seat belt for installing child
seats in the outboard positions. Please
refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible
Child Restraint System” for typical installation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child restraint manufacturer when installing your child
restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be
installed as described here.
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of
the child restraint to the lower anchorages
in the selected seating position.
If the selected seating position has a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat
belt, stow the seat belt, following the instructions below. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to
check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage.
See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage”
for directions to attach a tether anchor.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. For
some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward
into the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the
child seat at the belt path. It should not
move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat
belts that are not being used by other occupants or being used to secure child restraints.
An unused belt could injure a child if they
play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt
retractor. Before installing a child restraint
using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt
behind the child restraint and out of the
child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the child
restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not
lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the
vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint
to the LATCH anchorages can lead to
failure of the restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed. Follow the
123
SAFETY
WARNING!
WARNING!
child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
• Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed
by correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used
for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for
attaching other items or equipment to
the vehicle.
failure of the restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to
124
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked
mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract
back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR
will make a clicking noise while the webbing
is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the
“Automatic Locking Mode” description in
“Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems”
for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
Always use the tether anchor when using the
weight of the child restraint) for using the
seat belt to install a forward facing child reWeight limit of the Child Restraint
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
straint, up to the recommended weight limit of
forward facing child restraint?
the child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger seat and
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
Yes
the child restraint is allowed, if the child reback of the front passenger seat?
straint manufacturer also allows contact.
The head restraints can be removed in every
Can the head restraints be removed?
Yes
seating position.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating posiseat belt against the belt path of the child reNo
tion with an ALR retractor.
straint?
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to properly secure a child restraint can lead to
failure of the restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed.
WARNING!
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. For some second row
seats, you may need to recline the seat
and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most posi-
tion to make room for the child seat. You
may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt
path of the child restraint. Do not twist the
belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
125
SAFETY
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap
portion tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to
pull out any webbing. If the retractor is
not locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
126
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap.
See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage”
for directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the
child seat at the belt path. It should not
move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage:
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rearfacing car seat to any location in front of
the car seat, including the seat frame or a
tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating
position, located behind the top of the
vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of approved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
Transporting Pets
1. Look behind the seating position where
you plan to install the child restraint to
find the tether anchorage. You may need
to move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is
no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head restraints, raise the head restraint, and
where possible, route the tether strap under the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around
the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could
harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be
thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in
pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured
by seat belts.
Rear Seat Tether Anchors
SAFETY TIPS
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap
could lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the
child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split
rear seat, make sure the tether strap
does not slip into the opening between
the seatbacks as you remove slack in the
strap.
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury
or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
127
SAFETY
WARNING!
WARNING!
In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
• If you are required to drive with the
trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make
sure that all windows are closed and the
climate control BLOWER switch is set at
high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked
vehicle with the engine running, adjust
your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless. Breathing it can make
you unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage
or in confined areas any longer than
needed to move your vehicle in or out of
the area.
128
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have
been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding
seat belt or retractor condition, replace the
seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light
will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN.
If the light is either not on during starting,
stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at your authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this
light will illuminate with a single chime when
a fault with the Air Bag System has been
detected. It will stay on until the fault is
removed. If the light comes on intermittently
or remains on while driving, have your authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost
mode and place the blower control on high
speed. You should be able to feel the air
directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster
is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor
mat that is securely attached using the floor
mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position
and interfere with the accelerator, brake or
clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your
vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded,
or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle
control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH:
your floor
• ALWAYS securely attach
mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO
NOT install your floor mat upside down
or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to
confirm mat is secured using the floor
mat fasteners on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other floor mat.
NEVER install or stack an additional
floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit
your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat
WARNING!
that cannot be properly attached and
secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA
approved floor mat for the specific
make, model, and year of your vehicle.
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on
the driver’s side floor area. To check for
interference, with the vehicle properly
parked with the engine off, fully depress
the accelerator, the brake, and the
clutch pedal (if present) to check for
interference. If your floor mat interferes
with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat
in your trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat
on the passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area
when the vehicle is moving. Objects can
become trapped under accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals and could cause
a loss of vehicle control.
129
SAFETY
WARNING!
• NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects could change the position of the
floor mat and may cause interference
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals.
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed
and re-installed, always properly attach
carpet to the floor and check the floor
mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle
carpet. Fully depress each pedal to
check for interference with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals then reinstall the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat
130
WARNING!
has been properly installed and is secured to your vehicle using the floor mat
fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones,
nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the
tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,
cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for
tightness. Check the tires (including spare)
for proper cold inflation pressure.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid
leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or
if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The
cause should be located and corrected immediately.
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE . . . . . . .133
Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Stopping The Engine . . . . . . . . . . . .135
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
OPERATION — IF EQUIPPED . . .148
Jeep Active Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . . . . .135
SELEC-TERRAIN —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
PARK BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Mode Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . .150
Electric Park Brake (EPB) . . . . . . . . .136
STOP/START SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
MANUAL TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Ignition Park Interlock . . . . . . . . . . .142
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Six-Speed Or Nine-Speed Automatic
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . .153
To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . .154
To
To
To
To
Vary The Speed Setting .
Resume Speed . . . . .
Accelerate For Passing .
Deactivate . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.154
.155
.155
.155
PARKSENSE REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .155
ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . .
Instrument Cluster Display —
Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ParkSense System Usage Precautions.
.156
.156
.156
.156
LANESENSE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
LaneSense Operation . . . . . .
Turning LaneSense On Or Off .
LaneSense Warning Message .
Changing LaneSense Status. .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.157
.158
.158
.160
PARKVIEW REAR BACK-UP
CAMERA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Symbols And Messages On The
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
131
STARTING AND OPERATING
REFUELING THE VEHICLE. . . . . .161
TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . .163
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . .163
RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . .163
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel
Drive (FWD) Models. . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Recreational Towing — 4X4 Models . . .164
132
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and
fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock
your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission
gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless EnterN-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A
child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury
or death.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the
NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake
before shifting to any driving range.
Normal Starting
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
Cycle the ignition switch to the START position and release when the engine starts. If the
engine fails to start within 10 seconds, cycle
the ignition switch to the LOCK/OFF position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Tip Start Feature
will automatically disengage itself when the
engine is running. If the engine fails to start,
cycle the ignition switch to the OFF position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes before shifting into
any driving gear.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if
the following precautions are not observed:
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE
only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Cycle the ignition switch to START position
and release it as soon as the starter engages.
The starter motor will continue to run, and
133
STARTING AND OPERATING
Keyless Ignition Functions — Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to
start the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to
start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push
the button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
134
Keyless Ignition Functions — With Driver’s Foot
OFF The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
Keyless Ignition Functions — Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
The Keyless Ignition feature operates similar
to an ignition switch. It has three modes,
OFF, ON/RUN, and START. To change the
ignition modes without starting the vehicle
and use the accessories follow these steps
starting with the ignition switch in the OFF
mode:
2. Press and hold the clutch pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
1. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button
once to change the ignition switch to the
ON/RUN mode.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to change the ignition switch
to the OFF mode.
Manual Transmission
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine.
Apply the brakes before shifting into any
driving gear.
1. The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.
3. The system takes over and attempts to
start the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to
start, the starter will disengage automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push
the button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
Keyless Ignition Functions — With Driver’s Foot
OFF The Brake Pedal/Clutch Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The Keyless Ignition feature operates similar
to an ignition switch. It has three modes,
OFF, ON/RUN, and START. To change the
ignition modes without starting the vehicle
and use the accessories follow these steps
starting with the ignition switch in the OFF
position:
1. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button
once to change the ignition to the ON/
RUN mode.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to change the ignition switch
to the OFF mode.
Stopping The Engine
Vehicles Equipped With Electronic Key (Keyless
Ignition):
To shut off the engine with vehicle speed
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), you must push
and hold the START/STOP button or push the
START/STOP button three times consecutively within a few seconds. The engine will
shut down, and the ignition will be placed in
the RUN position.
Turning Off the car (placing the ignition from
the RUN position to the STOP position), the
power supply to the accessories are maintained for a period of three minutes.
Opening the driver side door with the ignition
in RUN will sound a short chime that reminds
the driver to place the ignition to STOP.
When the ignition is in the STOP/OFF position, the window switches remains active for
three minutes. Opening a front door will cancel this function.
After severe driving, idle the engine to allow
the temperature inside the engine compartment to cool before shutting off the engine.
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle)
in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles
(100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or
90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental
and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
factory is a high-quality energy conserving
type lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality
grades, refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications”.
135
STARTING AND OPERATING
The park brake can also be automatically
released. With the engine running and the
transmission in gear, release the brake pedal
and depress the throttle pedal. For safety
reasons, your seat belt must also be fastened.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
NOTE:
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during
its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of
operation. This should be considered a normal part of the break-in and not interpreted
as a problem.
PARK BRAKE
Electric Park Brake (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with a new Electric
Park Brake System (EPB) that offers greater
convenience. The park brake switch is located in the center console.
136
• You may hear a slight whirring sound from
the back of the vehicle while the parking
brake engages or disengages.
Parking Brake Switch
To apply the park brake manually, pull up on
the switch momentarily. The BRAKE warning
lamp in the instrument cluster and an indicator on the switch will illuminate.
To release the park brake manually, the ignition switch must be in RUN. Then put your
foot on the brake pedal and push the park
brake switch down momentarily. Once the
park brake is fully disengaged, the BRAKE
warning lamp and the switch indicator will
extinguish.
• If your foot is on the brake pedal while you
are engaging or disengaging the parking
brake, you may notice a small amount of
brake pedal movement.
• The new Auto Park Brake feature can be
used to apply the park brake automatically
every time you park the vehicle. Auto Park
Brake can be enabled and disabled in the
Settings menu in Uconnect.
• The parking brake can be engaged even
when the ignition switch is OFF, however, it
can only be disengaged when the ignition
switch is in the ON/RUN position.
• If exceptional circumstances should make
it necessary to engage the park brake while
the vehicle is in motion, maintain upward
pressure on the electric park brake switch
for as long as engagement is desired. The
BRAKE warning lamp will illuminate, and a
continuous chime will sound. The rear stop
lamps will also be illuminated automatically while the vehicle remains in motion.
• SafeHold a new feature that will automatically apply the park brake under certain
conditions. The EPB monitors the status of
the driver’s seat belt, driver’s door and
pedal positions to determine if the driver
may have exited while the vehicle is still
capable of moving and will then automatically apply the park brake to prevent the
vehicle from rolling.
• The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the
EPB switch is held for longer than 20 seconds in either the released or applied position. The light will extinguish upon releasing the switch.
• Refer to the Starting And Operating section
of your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the parking brake. Always apply the parking brake fully when parked
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
• When exiting the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission
gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake
when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll
and cause damage or injury. Also be
certain to leave the transmission in
PARK. Failure to do so may allow the
vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
• Driving the vehicle with the parking
brake engaged, or repeated use of the
parking brake to slow the vehicle may
cause serious damage to the brake system.
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains
on with the parking brake released, a brake
system malfunction is indicated. Have the
brake system serviced by an authorized
dealer immediately.
137
STARTING AND OPERATING
Auto Park Brake
The EPB can be programmed to be applied
automatically whenever the vehicle speed is
below 1.9 mph (3 km/h) and the automatic
transmission is placed in PARK, or with a
manual transmission, whenever the ignition
switch is in the OFF position. Auto Park
Brake is enabled and disabled by customer
selection through the Customer Programmable Features section of the Uconnect Settings.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can
be bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to
the release position while the transmission is
placed in PARK (automatic transmission)
and the ignition is in the ON/RUN position.
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system that will engage the park brake automatically if the vehicle is left unsecured while the
ignition switch is in ON/RUN.
For automatic transmissions, the EPB will
automatically engage if all of the following
conditions are met:
• Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
• There is no attempt to depress the brake
pedal or accelerator pedal.
• The seat belt is unbuckled.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
• The driver door is open.
• The vehicle is not in the PARK position.
For manual transmissions, the EPB will automatically engage if all of the following conditions are met:
You or others could be injured if you leave
the vehicle unattended without having the
park brake fully applied. The park brake
should always be applied when the driver
is not in the vehicle, especially on an
incline.
• Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
• There is no attempt to depress the brake
pedal or accelerator pedal.
• The clutch pedal is not pressed.
• The seat belt is unbuckled.
• The driver door is open.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by
pushing the EPB Switch while the driver door
is open and the brake pedal is pressed. Once
manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled
138
again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph
(20 km/h) or the ignition is turned to the OFF
position and back to ON/RUN again.
CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal partially engaged, as this will cause abnormal
wear on the clutch.
NOTE:
During cold weather, you may experience
increased effort in shifting until the transmission fluid warms up. This is normal.
To shift the gears, fully press the clutch pedal
and place the gear selector into the desired
gear position (the diagram for the engagement of the gears is displayed on the handle
of the selector).
To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL
position, lift the REVERSE ring, located below the knob and move the gear selector all
the way left and then forward.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for fuel economy and performance, it
should be upshifted as listed in the recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the vehicle
speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily
loaded or pulling a trailer, these recommended up-shift speeds may not apply.
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting
gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly
press the accelerator pedal.
You should always use first gear when starting
from a standing position.
Gear Selector
All Engines
Gear Selection
Accel.
Cruise
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
2 to 3
3 to 4
24 (39)
34 (55)
19 (31)
27 (43)
4 to 5
47 (76)
37 (60)
5 to 6
56 (90)
41 (66)
139
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
A certain amount of noise from the transmission is normal. This noise can be most noticeable when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL
with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal released), but it may also be heard when driving. The noise may also be more noticeable
when the transmission is warm. This noise is
normal and is not an indication of a problem
with your clutch or transmission.
Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear
is recommended to preserve brakes when
driving down steep hills. In addition, downshifting at the right time provides better acceleration when you desire to resume speed.
Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to
avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch.
Gear Selection
Maximum Speed
140
6 to 5
80 (129)
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip, and the vehicle could skid.
pressed. If transfer case is in low range
the vehicle speeds to cause engine and
clutch damage are significantly lower.
• Failure to follow the maximum recommended downshifting speeds may cause
the engine damage and/or damage the
clutch, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
• Descending a hill in low range with
clutch pedal depressed could result in
clutch damage.
CAUTION!
• Skipping gears and downshifting into
lower gears at higher vehicle speeds can
damage the engine and clutch systems,
Any attempt to shift into lower gear with
clutch pedal depressed may result damage to the clutch system. Shifting into
lower gear and releasing the clutch may
result in engine damage.
• When descending a hill, be very careful
to downshift one gear at a time to prevent overspeeding the engine which can
cause engine damage, and/or clutch
damage, even if the clutch pedal is
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
5 to 4
4 to 3
70 (113)
50 (81)
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended
downshifting speeds may cause the engine to
overspeed and/or damage the clutch disc,
even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
3 to 2
30 (48)
2 to 1
15 (24)
CAUTION!
If you skip a gear while downshifting or
downshift at too high of a vehicle speed,
these conditions may cause the engine to
overspeed if too low of a gear is selected
and the clutch pedal is released. Damage
to the clutch and the transmission can
result from skipping a gear while downshifting or downshifting at too high of a
vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal is
held pressed (i.e., not released).
Parking
When parking and leaving the vehicle, proceed as follows:
• Engage a gear (first gear if facing uphill or
reverse if facing downhill) and leave the
wheels turned.
• Stop the engine and engage the park brake.
• Always remove the key fob.
• Block the wheels with a wedge or a stone if
the vehicle is parked on a steep slope.
NOTE:
NEVER leave the car with the gearbox in
neutral (or, if equipped with automatic transmission, before placing the gear lever in
PARK).
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle. Always remove the key fob when
exiting the vehicle and take it with you.
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION — IF
EQUIPPED
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the park brake. Always apply
the park brake fully when exiting the
vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you
and others if it is not in PARK. Check by
WARNING! trying to move the gear se-
WARNING!
lector out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something.
Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• The vehicle may not engage a newly
selected gear if the vehicle is moving
while shifting.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle
could injure those in or near the vehicle.
As with all vehicles, you should never
exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always
come to a complete stop, then apply the
park brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When
the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
141
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
CAUTION!
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the park brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition
in the ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
Damage to the transmission may occur if
the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE
only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
142
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal
while shifting out of PARK.
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to
be in PARK before the ignition can be turned
to the OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK. This system also locks the transmission in PARK
whenever the ignition is in the OFF mode.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must
be in the ON/RUN mode (whether the engine
is running or not), and the brake pedal must
be pressed. The brake pedal must also be
pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or
moving at low speeds.
Six-Speed Or Nine-Speed Automatic
Transmission
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with a sixspeed or nine-speed automatic transmission,
depending on model. This section describes
operation of both the six-speed and ninespeed transmission.
The transmission gear range (PRND) is displayed both beside the gear selector and in
the instrument cluster. To select a gear range,
push the lock button on the gear selector and
move the selector rearward or forward. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift the
transmission out of PARK (or NEUTRAL,
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds). Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects REVERSE
while driving forward), the position indicator
will blink continuously until the selector is
returned to the proper position, or the requested shift can be completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver
inputs, along with environmental and road
conditions. The transmission electronics are
self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts
on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt.
This is a normal condition, and precision
shifts will develop within a few hundred miles
(kilometers).
The nine-speed transmission has been developed to meet the needs of current and future
FWD/AWD vehicles. Software and calibration
is refined to optimize the customer’s driving
experience and fuel economy. By design,
some vehicle and driveline combinations utilize 9th gear only in very specific driving
situations and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and
the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your
foot on the brake pedal when shifting between these gears.
The transmission gear selector provides
PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and
AutoStick (+/-) shift positions. Manual shifts
can be made using the AutoStick shift control. Moving the gear selector into the
AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE
position) activates AutoStick mode, providing
manual shift control and displaying the current gear in the instrument cluster (as 1, 2, 3,
etc.). Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or
rearward (+) while in the AutoStick position
will manually select the transmission gear.
Refer to "AutoStick" in this section for further
information.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position
(when pushed forward) it is probably in the
AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE
position). In AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the
instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to
the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for
access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Selector
143
STARTING AND OPERATING
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when
shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important
when the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use
PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when exiting the vehicle in
this range.
When parking on a level surface, you may
shift the transmission into PARK first, and
then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking
brake before shifting the transmission to
PARK, otherwise the load on the transmission
locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the gear selector out of PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels to-
144
ward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
NOTE:
Block the wheels with a wedge or a stone if
the vehicle is parked on a steep slope.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the park brake. Always apply
the park brake fully when exiting the
vehicle to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you
and others if it is not in PARK. Check by
WARNING! trying to move the gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal
released. Make sure the transmission is
in PARK before exiting the vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something.
Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• The vehicle may not engage a newly
selected gear if the vehicle is moving
while shifting.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle
could injure those in or near the vehicle.
As with all vehicles, you should never
exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always
come to a complete stop, then apply the
park brake, shift the transmission into
PARK, and turn the ignition OFF. When
the ignition is in the OFF mode, the
transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the park brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition
in the ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls,
or move the vehicle.
press the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting
from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
gear range, as this can damage the drivetrain.
CAUTION!
• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of PARK, you must turn the
ignition to the ON/RUN mode, and also
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing
for prolonged periods with the engine running. The engine may be started in this range.
Apply the park brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
WARNING!
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
• When shifting into PARK, push the lock
button on the gear selector, and firmly
move the selector all the way forward until
it stops and is fully seated.
• Look at the transmission gear position display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position (P).
• With brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn
off the ignition to coast down a hill. These
are unsafe practices that limit your response to changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle
and have a collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for
any other reason with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
damage.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emergency”
for further information.
145
STARTING AND OPERATING
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving characteristics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds, or while
towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick
shift control to select a lower gear (refer to
"AutoStick" in this section for further information). Under these conditions, using a
lower gear will improve performance and extend transmission life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat buildup.
If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operating limits, the transmission controller may modify the transmission shift
schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or expand the range of torque converter clutch
engagement. This is done to prevent transmission damage due to overheating.
146
If the transmission becomes extremely hot,
the "Transmission Temperature Warning
Light" may illuminate, and the transmission
may operate differently until the transmission cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission operation may be modified depending on engine and/or transmission temperature as well
as vehicle speed. This feature improves warm
up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of
the torque converter clutch (and, for the
nine-speed, shifts into 8th or 9th gear), are
inhibited until the engine and/or transmission is warm (refer to the “Note” under
“Torque Converter Clutch” in this section).
Normal operation will resume once the temperature(s) have risen to a suitable level.
AUTOSTICK
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving
you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick
allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more
control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing, and many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick
position (beside the DRIVE position), it can
be moved forward and rearward. This allows
the driver to manually select the transmission
gear being used. Moving the gear selector
forward (-) triggers a downshift and rearward
(+) an upshift. The current gear is displayed
in the instrument cluster.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will
shift up or down when the driver moves the
gear selector rearward (+) or forward (-), unless an engine lugging or overspeed condition
would result. It will remain in the selected
gear until another upshift or downshift is
chosen, except as described below.
• Six-speed transmissions will automatically
upshift when necessary to prevent engine
over-speed.
• The transmission will automatically downshift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine
lugging) and will display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first gear when coming to a stop.
After a stop, the driver should manually
upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle
is accelerated.
• You can start out, from a stop, in first or
second gear (or third gear, in six-speed
models, or in 4LO range, Snow mode, or
Sand mode, where available). Tapping (+)
(at a stop) will allow starting in second gear.
Starting out in second gear can be helpful
in snowy or icy conditions.
• If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to over-speed, that shift will not
occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift
at too low of a vehicle speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift
mode if a fault or overheat condition is
detected.
NOTE:
When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is
enabled, AutoStick is not active.
To disengage AutoStick, return the gear selector to the DRIVE position. You can shift in
or out of the AutoStick position at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnormal conditions. If a condition
is detected that could result in transmission
damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is
activated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in a fixed gear, or may remain in
NEUTRAL. The Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) may be illuminated. Limp Home Mode
may allow the vehicle to be driven to an
authorized dealer for service without damaging the transmission.
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition until the engine turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the transmission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit your authorized
dealer at your earliest possible convenience.
Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equipment to assess the condition of your transmission. If the transmission cannot be reset,
authorized dealer service is required.
147
STARTING AND OPERATING
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy
has been included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle. A clutch within the
torque converter engages automatically at
calibrated speeds. This may result in a
slightly different feeling or response during
normal operation in the upper gears. When
the vehicle speed drops or during some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage
until the engine and/or transmission is warm
(usually after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km] of
driving). Because the engine speed is higher
when the torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmission is
not shifting properly when the vehicle is cold.
This is normal. The torque converter clutch
will function normally once the powertrain is
sufficiently warm.
148
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE
OPERATION — IF EQUIPPED
Jeep Active Drive
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Power
Transfer Unit (PTU). This system is automatic with no driver inputs or additional
driving skills required. Under normal driving
conditions, the front wheels provide most of
the traction. If the front wheels begin to lose
traction, power is shifted automatically to the
rear wheels. The greater the front wheel traction loss, the greater the power transfer to the
rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy
throttle input (where one may have no wheel
spin), torque will be sent to the rear in a
preemptive effort to improve vehicle launch
and performance characteristics.
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and
type tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be
used. Unequal tire size may cause failure
of the power transfer unit.
Four Wheel Drive (4x4)
The four wheel drive (4WD) is fully automatic
in normal driving mode.
NOTE:
It is not possible to carry out the change of
mode when the vehicle exceeds the speed of
75 mph (120 km/h).
Enabling Four Wheel Drive (4x4)
The buttons for the activation of four wheel
drive are located on the device Selec-Terrain
and allow you to select the following:
• 4WD LOCK
• 4WD LOW — (Trailhawk models only)
Active Drive Control — If Equipped
Active Drive With Low Control — (Trailhawk
models only)
Enabling 4WD LOW
With the vehicle stationary, the ignition in the
ON/RUN or with the engine running, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL and push the
button once 4WD LOW. The instrument cluster will display the message "4WD LOW" once
the shift is complete.
NOTE:
• Both LOCK and LOW LEDs will blink and
then become active on the Selec-Terrain
switch until the shift is complete.
• The instrument cluster display will illuminate the "4WD LOW" icon.
Selec-Terrain Switch
The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) is locked to
ensure immediate availability of torque to the
rear drive axles. This feature is selectable in
AUTO mode and automatic in the other driving mode. 4WD LOCK can be enabled by the
following ways:
Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk)
The 4WD LOW mode helps to improve the
off-road performance in all modes. To enable
4WD LOW, please follow the steps below:
Disabling 4WD LOW
To disable the 4WD LOW mode, the vehicle
must be stationary and the transmission
shifted into NEUTRAL. Push the 4WD LOW
button once.
• When the 4WD LOCK button is pushed.
• When the Selec-Terrain switch is rotated
from AUTO to any other off-road modes.
149
STARTING AND OPERATING
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF
EQUIPPED
• SNOW: This mode allows you to have greater
stability under conditions of bad weather.
For use on and off road on surfaces with
poor traction, such as roads covered with
snow. When in SNOW mode (depending on
certain operating conditions), the transmission may use second gear (rather than first
gear) during launches, to minimize wheel
slippage.
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of
the vehicle control systems, along with driver
input, to provide the best performance for all
terrains.
Mode Selection Guide
Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the
desired mode.
• SAND: For off-road driving or use on surfaces with poor traction, such as dry sand.
The transmission is set to provide maximum traction.
Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk)
• AUTO: This four-wheel drive operation is a
continuous operation, is fully automatic
and can be used on and off road. This mode
balances traction to ensure maneuverability and acceleration improvement compared to a vehicle with two wheel drive.
This mode also reduces fuel consumption,
since it allows the disconnect of the drive
shaft where conditions permit.
Selec-Terrain Switch
150
• MUD: For off-road driving or use on surfaces
with poor traction, such as roads covered by
mud or wet grass.
• ROCK (Trailhawk only): This mode is only
available in 4WD LOW range. The device
sets the vehicle to maximize traction and
allow the highest steering capacity for offroad surfaces. This mode gives you the
maximum performance off-road. Use for
low speed obstacles such as large rocks,
deep ruts, etc.
NOTE:
Automatic Mode
• Rock mode is only available on the vehicles
equipped with the Off-Road package.
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. At that time,
the system will go into STOP/START READY
and if all other conditions are met, can go
into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
• Activate the Hill Descent Control for steep
downhill control. See “Electronic Brake
Control System” in this section for further
information.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop
the engine automatically during a vehicle
stop if the required conditions are met. Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal will automatically re-start the
engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy
duty starter, enhanced battery, and other upgraded engine parts, to handle the additional
engine starts.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following
Must Occur:
• The system must be in STOP/START
READY state. A STOP/START READY message will be displayed in the instrument
cluster display within the Stop/Start section. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” in your Owner’s Manual for further
information.
• The vehicle must be completely stopped.
• The gear selector must be in a forward gear
and the brake pedal depressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer
will move to the zero position and the Stop/
Start telltale will illuminate indicating you
are in Autostop. Customer settings will be
maintained upon return to an engine running
condition.
Refer to the “Stop/Start System” in the
“Starting And Operating” section located in
your Owner’s Manual for further information.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop
Prior to engine shut down, the system will
check many safety and comfort conditions to
see if they are fulfilled. Detailed information
about the operation of the Stop/Start system
may be viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/Start Screen. In the following situations the engine will not stop:
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
• Driver’s door is not closed.
• Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
• Battery charge is low.
• The vehicle is on a steep grade.
151
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and
an acceptable cabin temperature has not
been achieved.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high
blower speed.
• HVAC set to MAX A/C.
• Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
• The transmission is not in a forward gear.
• Hood is open.
• Vehicle is in 4WD LOW transfer case mode.
• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient
pressure.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the STOP/START system going into a STOP/START READY state
under more extreme conditions of the items
listed above.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode
While in a forward gear, the engine will start
when the brake pedal is released or the
throttle pedal is depressed. The transmission
will automatically re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop Include:
• The transmission selector is moved out of
DRIVE.
• Accelerator pedal input.
• To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
• Engine temp too high.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
• 5 MPH (8 km/h) threshold not achieved
from previous AUTOSTOP.
• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted.
• Steering angle beyond threshold.
• Battery voltage drops too low.
• Adaptive Cruise Control is on and speed is
set.
• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake
pedal applications).
152
• STOP/START OFF switch is pressed.
• A STOP/START system error occurs.
• 4WD system is put into 4WD LOW mode.
Conditions That Force An Application Of The
Electric Park Brake While In Autostop Mode:
• The drivers door is open and brake pedal
released.
• The drivers door is open and the drivers
seat belt is unbuckled.
• The engine hood has been opened.
• A STOP/START system error occurs.
If the Electric Park Brake is applied with the
engine off, the engine may require a manual
restart and the electric park brake may require a manual release (depress brake pedal
and press Electric Park Brake switch). Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System
1. Push the STOP/START Off switch (located
on the switch bank). The light on the
switch will illuminate.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off
the STOP/START system) the engine will
not be stopped.
4. The STOP/START system will reset itself
back to an ON condition every time the
ignition is turned off and back on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System
Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located
on the switch bank). The light on the switch
will turn off.
For complete details on the Stop/Start System refer to the “Stop/Start System” in the
“Starting And Operating” section located in
your Owner’s Manual for further information.
SPEED CONTROL
STOP/START OFF Switch
2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will appear in instrument cluster display. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in
your Owner’s Manual for further
information.
Speed Control Switches
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Push
Push
Push
Push
Push
CANC/Cancel
SET (+)/Accel
RES/Resume
On/Off
SET (-)/Decel
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
25 mph (40 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
153
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the
Speed Control System has been designed to
shut down if multiple speed control functions
are operated at the same time. If this occurs,
the Speed Control System can be reactivated
by pushing the Speed Control on/off button
and resetting the desired vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed
Control. The cruise indicator light in the
instrument cluster display will illuminate. To
turn the system off, push the on/off button a
second time. The cruise indicator light will
turn off. The system should be turned off
when not in use.
154
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose control and have an accident. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pushing the
SET (+) or SET (-) button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings. Refer
to ”Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual for more information. The speed
increment shown is dependent on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result
in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result
in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings. Refer
to ”Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual for more information. The speed
increment shown is dependent on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the
RES button and release. Resume can be used
at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the
CANC (cancel) button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate
the speed control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or cycling the ignition to OFF, erases the set speed from
memory.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual and audible indications of the
distance between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during
a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense
System Usage Precautions” for limitations of
this system and recommendations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the
ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE. The system will
remain active while in REVERSE until the
vehicle speed is increased to approximately
7 mph (11 km/h) or above. While in REVERSE, and above the system's operating
speed, a warning will appear within the instrument cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will become active again when the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
155
STARTING AND OPERATING
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the
rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind
the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of
view. The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depending on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch, located on the switch
panel below the Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster
display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for approximately five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your
Owner’s Manual for further details. When the
gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the
system is disabled, the instrument cluster
display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service.
The ParkSense switch LED will be off when
the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
Instrument Cluster Display — Warning
ParkSense Switch
156
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if Sound and Display is selected
from the Customer - Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect System. Refer to
"Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your
Owner's Manual for further information.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located
within the instrument cluster display. It provides visual warnings to indicate the distance
between the rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Instrument Cluster
Display” in your Owner's Manual for further
information.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense OFF, the instrument cluster display will read “PARKSENSE
OFF” Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense
OFF, it remains off until you turn it on again,
even if you cycle the ignition.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch or damage them. The
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so
can result in the system not working properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper,
or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the
ParkSense system OFF if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are
placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
• The operation of the rear sensors is automatically deactivated when the trailer's
electric plug is inserted in the vehicle's tow
hook socket. The rear sensors are automatically reactivated when the trailer's cable
plug is removed.
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle, look
behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and blind spots before backing up. You are responsible for safety
and must continue to pay attention to
your surroundings. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not
used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or
obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the rear
fascia when the loudspeaker sounds the
continuous tone. Also, the sensors could
detect the ball mount and hitch ball
assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above
or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense.
LANESENSE
LaneSense Operation
The LaneSense system is operational at
speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below
112 mph (180 km/h). The LaneSense system
uses a forward looking camera to detect lane
markings and measure vehicle position
within the lane boundaries.
157
STARTING AND OPERATING
When both lane markings are detected and
the driver unintentionally drifts out of the
lane (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense
system provides a haptic warning in the form
of torque applied to the steering wheel, as
well as a visual warning in the instrument
cluster display, to prompt the driver to remain
within the lane boundaries.
tected on the steering wheel. The system will
cancel if the driver does not return their
hands to the wheel.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button once to turn the system off
(LED turns on).
Turning LaneSense On Or Off
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last
system state on or off from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the
ON/RUN position.
The default status of LaneSense is “Off”.
The LaneSense button is located on the
switch panel below the Uconnect display.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying torque into the steering
wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected
and the driver unintentionally drifts across the
lane marking (no turn signal applied), the
LaneSense system provides a visual warning
through the instrument cluster display to
prompt the driver to remain within the lane.
When only a single lane marking is detected, a
haptic (torque) warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met,
the LaneSense system will monitor if the
driver’s hands are on the steering wheel and
provide an audible and visual warning to the
driver when the driver’s hands are not de-
158
LaneSense Warning Message
The LaneSense system will indicate the current lane drift condition through the instrument cluster display.
Base Instrument Cluster Display — If
Equipped
LaneSense Warning Button
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button to turn the system on (LED
turns off). A “Lane Sense On” message is
shown in the instrument cluster display.
When the LaneSense system is on; the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected and the LaneSense telltale
is solid white.
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the
is solid white when
LaneSense telltale
only the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to provide
visual warnings in the instrument cluster
display if an unintentional lane departure
occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the
lane has been approached and is in a lane
departure situation, the left thick lane line
flashes from white to gray, the left thin line
remains solid white and the LaneSense
changes from solid white to
telltale
flashing yellow.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with the
similar behavior for a right lane departure
when only the right lane marking has been
detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been detected. The LaneSense telltale
is solid
green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to
provide visual warnings in the instrument
cluster display and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left thick lane line and
the left thin line turn solid white. The Lanechanges from solid green
Sense telltale
to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite
direction of the lane boundary.
For example: if approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
• When the LaneSense system senses the
lane has been approached and is in a lane
departure situation, the left thick lane line
flashes from white to gray, the left thin line
remains solid white and the LaneSense
changes from solid yellow to
telltale
flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite
direction of the lane boundary.
For example: if approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with the
similar behavior for a right lane departure.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display —
If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on; the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries have not been detected and the LaneSense telltale
is solid white.
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the
is solid white when
LaneSense telltale
only the left lane marking has been detected and the system is ready to provide
visual warnings in the instrument cluster
display if an unintentional lane departure
occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses the
lane has been approached and is in a lane
departure situation, the left thick lane line
flashes yellow, the left thin line remains
solid yellow and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
159
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with the
similar behavior for a right lane departure
when only the right lane marking has been
detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been deis solid
tected. The LaneSense telltale
green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to
provide visual warnings in the instrument
cluster display and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane departure occurs.
• When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left thick lane line and
left thin line turn solid yellow. The Lanechanges from solid green
Sense telltale
to solid yellow. At this time torque is applied to the steering wheel in the opposite
direction of the lane boundary.
For example: if approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
160
• When the LaneSense system senses the
lane has been approached and is in a lane
departure situation, the left thick lane line
flashes yellow and the left thin line remains
solid yellow. The LaneSense telltale
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of
the lane boundary.
NOTE:
For example: if approaching the left side of the
lane the steering wheel will turn to the right.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK-UP
CAMERA
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with the
similar behavior for a right lane departure.
Changing LaneSense Status
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust
the intensity of the torque warning (Low/
Medium/High) and the warning zone sensitivity (Early/Medium/Late) that you can configure through the Uconnect system screen.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for further details.
• The system will not apply torque to the
steering wheel whenever a safety system
engages. (anti-lock brakes, traction control
system, electronic stability control, forward
collision warning, etc.).
• Use of the turn signals and Hazard Warning
flashers also suppresses the warnings.
Symbols And Messages On The Display
You can see an on-screen image of the rear of
your vehicle whenever the transmission is
shifted into REVERSE. The ParkView Rear
Back-Up Camera image will be displayed on
the Uconnect Display, located on the center
stack of the instrument panel.
If the Uconnect Display appears foggy, clean
the camera lens located on the rear of the
vehicle above the rear license plate.
Refer to “ParkView Back-Up Camera” in
“Starting And Operating” in your Owner's
Manual for further information.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up;
even when using the ParkView Rear
Back-Up Camera. Always check carefully
behind your vehicle, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, or blind spots before backing
up. You must continue to pay attention
while backing up. Failure to do so can
result in serious injury or death.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
The Capless Fuel System uses a flapper placed
at the filler pipe of the fuel tank; it opens and
closes automatically upon insertion/extraction
of the fuel nozzle. The Capless Fuel System is
designed so that it prevents the filling of an
incorrect type of fuel.
1. Open the fuel filler door by pushing on the
outer edge of the Fuel Door.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The
ParkView camera is unable to view every
obstacle or object in your drive path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle
must be driven slowly when using
ParkView to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/
her shoulder when using ParkView.
Filling Procedure
2. There is no fuel filler cap. A flapper door
inside the pipe seals the system.
3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler
pipe; the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door while refueling.
4. Fill the vehicle with fuel, and when the
fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel
tank is full.
Fuel Filler Door
161
STARTING AND OPERATING
5. Wait ten seconds before removing the fuel
nozzle to allow fuel to drain from nozzle.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off
prior to putting back in the spare tire
storage area.
6. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off,
the fuel tank is full.
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper door.
A funnel is provided to open the flapper door
to allow emergency refueling with a gas can.
WARNING!
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage
area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening
as the fuel nozzle.
Filling Procedure
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold
flapper door open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
162
• Never have any smoking materials lit in
or near the vehicle when the gas cap is
removed or the tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is in violation of most state
and federal fire regulations and may
cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped
into a portable container that is inside of
a vehicle. You could be burned. Always
place gas containers on the ground while
filling.
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Engine/Transmission
Model
Maximum GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
Maximum Tongue Wt. (See Note)
2.4L / Manual
FWD or 4WD
Trailer towing is not recommended.
2.4L / 6 Speed Auto
FWD or 4WD
Trailer towing is not recommended.
2.4L / 9 Speed Auto
4WD
2000 lbs (907 kg)
200 lbs (90 kg)
When towing a trailer the technically permissible laden weight may be exceeded by not more than 10% or 220 lbs (100 kg), whichever is lower
provided that the operating speed is restricted to 62 mph (100 km/h) or less.
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds and loads.
Towing limits quoted represent the maximum towing ability of the vehicle at its Gross Combined Mass to restart on a 12 percent gradient at sea
level.
The performance and economy of all models will be reduced when used for towing.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
TOWING CONDITION
Flat Tow
Dolly Tow
On Trailer
WHEELS OFF THE GROUND
NONE
REAR
FRONT
ALL
FRONT WHEEL DRIVE (FWD)
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
BEST METHOD
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
163
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
• When towing your vehicle, always follow
applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety
offices for additional details.
3. Apply the Electric Park Brake (EPB).
Place the transmission in PARK. Turn the
engine OFF.
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake
feature is disabled before towing this vehicle, to avoid inadvertent Electric Park
Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake
feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the
Uconnect Settings.
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive
(FWD) Models
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the
front wheels are OFF the ground. This may be
accomplished using a tow dolly (front wheels
off the ground) or vehicle trailer (all four
wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly,
follow this procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
164
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the
dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
5. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position,
but do not start the engine.
6. Press and hold the brake pedal.
7. Release the Electric Park Brake (EPB).
8. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the key fob,
and release the brake pedal.
CAUTION!
• Towing with the front wheels on the
ground will cause severe transmission
damage. Damage from improper towing
is not covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while
being towed.
Recreational Towing — 4X4 Models
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on
the ground, or using a towing dolly) is NOT
ALLOWED. This vehicle may be towed on
flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four
wheels are OFF the ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels
on the ground can cause severe transmission and/or power transfer unit damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING
FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution
Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
JACKING AND TIRE
CHANGING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . .166
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE . . .192
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE. . . .192
TOWING A DISABLED
VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Headlamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . .168
Replacing Exterior Bulbs. . . . . . . . . .168
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . .178
Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . .183
FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
JUMP STARTING . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Without The Key Fob . . . . . . . . . .
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models —
With Key Fob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4x4 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . .
General Information. . .
Fuse Location . . . . . .
Engine Compartment
Fuses/Distribution Unit.
Interior Fuses . . . . . .
Preparations For Jump Start. . . . . . . .189
Jump Starting Procedure. . . . . . . . . .190
ENHANCED ACCIDENT
RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) . . . .196
. . . . . . . . . .172
. . . . . . . . . .172
. . . . . . . . . .172
. . . . . . . . . .175
TIRE SERVICE KIT —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY . . . .191
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . .191
. .194
. .194
. .195
. .195
EVENT DATA RECORDER
(EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
165
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING
FLASHERS
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push
the switch a second time to turn off the
Hazard Warning flashers.
Control
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and it is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located
on the switch bank just above the climate
controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning flasher. When the switch is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition
is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning
flashers may discharge the battery.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Lamps
Front Courtesy Light
Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors)
Rear Dome Light (Models Without Retractable roof)
Rear Interior Lights (Models With Retractable roof)
Interior Lights
Dome Light (Glove Box)
166
Bulb Number
C5W
C5W
C5W
C5W
HT-168
HT-168
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps
Low Beam Headlamps (Halogen)
High Beam Headlamps (Halogen)
Front Position/Daytime Running Lights (DRL )
Front Direction Indicator Lamps
Front Position – Premium LED
Front Fog Lamps
Low Beam / High Beam Headlamps (HID)
Side Indicators (Front – Halogen)
Side Indicators (Front – HID)
Side Indicators (Side View Mirror)
Tail/Brake Lights
Turn Indicators
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
License Plate Lamp
Liftgate Lamp Reverse
Liftgate Lamp Tail
Bulb Number
H11LL
9005LL
PSX24W
7444NA
LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
H11LL
D3S (HID) (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
W5W
LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Premium Tail Lights: LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Base Tail Lights: W21/5WLL-M
W21WLL For Premium Tail Lamps
W21/5WLL For Base Tail Lamps
LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
W21WLL
LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
167
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
Headlamps — If Equipped
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
The headlamps contain a type of high voltage
discharge light source. High voltage can remain in the circuit even with the headlamp
switch off. Because of this, you should not
attempt to service a HID headlamp light
source yourself. If an HID headlamp light
source fails, take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
Hi/Lo Beam Light Halogen
The bulbs can be accessed from the wheel
liner with the following procedure:
Headlamps
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Remove the wheel liner.
3. Remove the headlamp bulb cap.
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a
blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and
becomes more white after approximately
10 seconds, as the system charges.
Headlamp Bulb Socket
5. Push on the locking tab on the headlamp
bulb connector and remove the bulb and
socket.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb
sockets of HID headlamps when the headlamp switch is turned ON. It may cause
serious electrical shock or electrocution if
not serviced properly. See your authorized
dealer for service.
168
4. Rotate the headlamp bulb socket counterclockwise then pull outwards.
6. Install the new headlamp bulb making
sure it’s properly locked.
Headlamp
1 — Low Beam Bulb Cap
2 — High Beam Bulb Cap
7. Install the headlamp bulb and socket;
turn it clockwise making sure it is properly
locked.
8. Reinstall the wheel liner.
NOTE:
We advise referring to an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Carry out the operation of replacing lamps
only with the engine off. Also make sure
that the engine is cold, to avoid the danger
of burns.
6. For the turn signal bulb, rotate in a counterclockwise direction and remove the
bulb and bulb socket. Pull the bulb axially
to remove it from the socket.
7. Install the bulb and sockets and rotate
them clockwise making sure that it is
properly locked.
8. Reconnect the electrical connectors.
9. Reinstall the wheel liner.
Turn Signal Light/Position Lights/Daytime Running Lights
NOTE:
We advise referring to an authorized dealer.
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
Front Fog Lights
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
2. Remove the wheel liner.
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
3. Remove the electrical connectors.
2. Remove the wheel liner.
4. For the DRL bulb, grip the bulb at the top
and bottom locking tabs and squeeze to
and remove the bulb.
3. By pushing the electrical connector tab
remove the electrical connector.
5. To replace the DRL bulb gently push bulb
towards housing. Be sure to hear both the
top and bottom locking tabs “CLICK” to
ensure the bulb is properly seated.
4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise, and
then replace the bulb.
Fog Lamp Housing
1 — Bulb
5. Insert the new bulb in the socket, making
sure the bulb is locked into place.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Reinstall the wheel liner.
NOTE:
We advise referring to an authorized dealer.
169
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Side Indicators
The Side Indicators are LED. For their replacement see your authorized dealer.
Rear Body Side Tail Lamps
Contain the following:
• Position lights
• Stop lights
• Direction indicator
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Using a suitable tool remove fasteners.
Body Side Tail Lamp Opening
1 — Fasteners
3. Disconnect the electrical connector by
pushing the release.
4. Remove the rear body side tail lamp, sliding it away from the back of the vehicle.
170
Body Side Tail Lamp
1 — Rear Body Side Tail Lamp
2 — Ball Stud
5. Replace the bulb as necessary by turning
and removing the bulb housing.
8. Reconnect the electrical connector.
Reverse Lamps
9. Reinstall the body side lamp making sure
to align the ball studs.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Using a suitable tool remove the access
panel for body side lamps, remove lift gate
access cover for lift gate lamps.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector by
pushing the release.
4. Remove bulb and replace making sure it is
properly locked.
5. Reconnect the electrical connector.
6. Reinstall the access panels making sure
they are locked in correctly.
Reverse Side of Tail Lamp
1 — Direction Indicator Bulb / Stop
Lamp Bulb
2 — Electrical Connector
3 — Ball Studs
6. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is
properly locked.
7. Reposition the rear body side lamp assembly on the car.
7. Finally close the tailgate.
3rd Stop Lamp
Body Side Tail Lamp
1 — Rear Body Side Tail Lamp
2 — Ball Stud
10. Install fasteners and tighten body side
lamp assembly.
The CHMSL is LED. For their replacement,
see your authorized dealer.
License Plate Lights
The License Plate light is LED. For their
replacement, see your authorized dealer.
11. Finally close the tailgate.
171
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
FUSES
WARNING!
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with
the same amp rating as the original fuse.
Never replace a fuse with another fuse of
higher amp rating. Never replace a
blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Do not place a fuse inside a
circuit breaker cavity or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses may result in
serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that
the ignition is off and that all the other
services are switched off and/or disengaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact
an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system), power unit systems (engine system, transmission system) or steering
172
system blows, contact an authorized
dealer.
Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution
Unit
General Information
The engine compartment fuse panel is located on the left side of the engine compartment.
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
Refer to your Owner’s Manual for further
information.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery discharge.
Fuse Location
The fuses are grouped into controllers located in the engine compartment.
Fuse Panel & Cover Location
Cavity
F01
F02
F03
Maxi Fuse
70 Amp Tan
70 Amp Tan
–
F04
F05
F06
F07
F08
F09
F10
–
–
40 Amp Orange
40 Amp Orange
–
–
–
Cartridge Fuse
–
–
30 Amp Pink with
HID Lamps
20 Amp Blue without
HID Lamps
40 Amp Tan
40 Amp Tan
–
–
30 Amp Pink
–
–
F11
–
–
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
–
40 Amp Orange
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Mini Fuse
–
–
–
Description
Module Body Computer
Module Body Computer, Rear Distribution Units
Supply Body Computer
–
–
–
–
–
7.5 Amp Brown
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow – 1.4L Gas & Diesel Engines
25 Amp Clear – 2.4 L Engines
7.5 Amp Brown
–
10 Amp Red
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
7.5 Amp Brown
20 Amp Yellow
15 Amp Blue
Brake Control Electronics Module
PTC Heater
Starter Relay
Rear Distribution Unit For Trailer Tow Usage
Supply for F24, F87, Steering Control
Control Module Engine
Horn
Supply Secondary Loads
Diesel Crankcase Heater
Brake Control Module Pump
Engine Control Module Power, Automatic Transmission
Engine Secondary Loads
12V Rear Cargo Outlet Ignition Powered
Air Conditioner Compressor and PWM Rad Fan enable
Cigar Lighter
Fuel Pump
173
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Cavity
F22
Maxi Fuse
–
Cartridge Fuse
–
F23
F24
F30
–
–
–
–
–
–
F81
F82
F83
F84
F87
F88
F89
F90
Fxx
60 Amp Blue
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
40 Amp Green
40 Amp Green
–
–
–
–
–
–
Mini Fuse
20 Amp Yellow – Gas Engine
15 Amp Blue – Diesel Engine
30 Amp Green
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow (Customer Selectable, Move From F18)
–
–
–
30 Amp Green
5 Amp Tan
7.5 Amp Brown
30 Amp Green
5 Amp Tan
10 Amp Red
Description
Power Control Module Engine
Window Heater Grid
Electronic Unit Supply Automatic Transmission
12V Rear Cargo Outlet Constant Battery Powered
Glow Plug Module
Diesel Fuel Filter Heater
HVAC Fan
Power Supply All Wheel Drive
Gear Selector Automatic Transmission
Heated Outside Mirrors
Heated Rear Window
IBS Sensor (Battery State Of Charge)
Dual Battery Control Relay
The Fuse Box has additional ATO fuse holders
installed on the bottom of the box.
Cavity
F1
F2
F3
174
ATO / UNIVAL Fuse
5 Amp Biege
10 Amp Red
2 Amp Grey
Description
Drivetrain Control Module (4x4/AWD)
ECM — Start Diagnostic Sense
Mod Steering Control
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located in the passenger compartment on the left side dash
panel under the instrument panel.
Cavity
F31
F33
F34
Blade Fuse
7.5 Amp Brown
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
F36
20 Amp Yellow
F37
F38
F42
F43
F47
F48
10 Amp Red
20 Amp Yellow
7.5 Amp Brown
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
20 Amp Yellow
F49
7.5 Amp Brown
F50
7.5 Amp Brown
F51
7.5 Amp Brown
F53
F94
7.5 Amp Brown
15 Amp Blue
Description
Occupant Restraint Controller
Window Motor Passenger
Window Motor Driver
Intrussion Module/Siren, Radio, UCI/USB Port, VSU, Climate Control, Electronic Steering
Lock, Power Folding Mirrors
Instrument Panel Cluster, Drivetrain Control Module, Adaptive Cruise, ECC (HVAC) Blower
Door Lock/Unlock
Brake System Module, Electric Power Steering
Washer Pump Front And Rear
Rear Left Window Lifter
Rear Right Window Lifter
Park Assist, Blind Spot, Voltage Stabilizer, Humidity Sensor, Sunroof, Electronic Steering
Lock, Temp Sense, Mirror, Heated Seats, Light And Rain Sensor
Occupant Restraint Controller
Electronic Climate Control, Occupant Classification, Rear View Camera, Climate Control, Headlamp Leveling, Terrain Select, Heated Rear Window, Trailer Tow, Haptic Lane Departure
Keyless Ignition Node Module, Electric Park Brake, RF Hub, Cluster
ECC (HVAC) Blower, Lumbar Adjust Driver Seat, Power Outlets
175
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit
To access the fuses, remove the access door
from the left rear panel of the rear cargo area.
The fuses may be contained in two units.
Fuse holder No. 1 is located closest to the
rear of the vehicle and fuse holder No. 2 (if
equipped with trailer towing) is located closest to the front of the vehicle.
Fuse Holder No. 1
Cavity
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
176
Mini Fuse
30 Amp Green
30 Amp Green
20 Amp Yellow
30 Amp Green
30 Amp Green
7.5 Amp Brown
15 Amp Blue
20 Amp Yellow
Description
Power Inverter
Memory Seat
Sun Roof – If Equipped
Power Seat (Passenger Side)
Power Seat (Driver Side)
Power Lumbar (Power Seats)
Heated Steering Wheel / Ventilated Seats
Heated Seats
Fuse Holder No. 2
Cavity
F1
F5
F6
F7
Mini Fuse
10 Amp Red
15 Amp Blue
15 Amp Blue
10 Amp Red
Description
Controller Exterior Lighting On Trailer
Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Drivers Side)
Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Passenger Side)
TTM Jumper Battery Feed
On the Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution
Unit bracket, there is a Maxi Fuse holder for
the Power Liftgate and an ATO / Uni Val fuse
holder for the HIFI Audio System.
Cavity
F01
Maxi Fuse
30 Amp Green
Description
Power Liftgate
Cavity
F02
ATO / Uni-Val Fuse
25 Amp Clear
Description
HIFI Audio System
177
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
JACKING AND TIRE
CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the
side of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be
crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take
it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool
for changing tires only. The jack should
not be used to lift the vehicle for service
purposes. The vehicle should be jacked
on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
178
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage
1. Open the liftgate.
If equipped, the jack and tools are located in
the rear storage compartment, below the
spare tire.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor
handle.
Load Floor Handle
Jack And Tools Location
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Jack
Alignment Pin
Wheel Bolt Wrench
Emergency Funnel
Screwdriver
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare
tire, and remove the spare wheel from the
vehicle. The jack and tools will be found
beneath.
WARNING!
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
jack parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as
far from the edge of the roadway as possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Jack And Tools
Spare Tire Fastener
4. Remove the alignment pin from the
middle, rotate the jack counterclockwise,
and lift it from the foam tray.
5. Remove the jack and wheel bolt wrench.
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Wheel Bolt Wrench
Jack
Emergency Funnel
Screwdriver
Alignment Pin
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid being hit
when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
4. Place the gear selector into PARK (automatic transmission) or REVERSE (manual
transmission).
5. Turn the ignition off to the OFF position.
179
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position.
For example, if the right front wheel is
being changed, block the left rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
180
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to help prevent personal injury or
damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as
far from the edge of the roadway as
possible before raising the vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly and set
the transmission in PARK.
• Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when
it is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is
on a jack. If you need to get under a
raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for lifting this vehicle during a
tire change.
WARNING!
• If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are securely stowed, spares must
be stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by
jacking on locations other than those indicated in the Jacking Instructions for this
vehicle.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area
that is closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack
screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack
saddle with the lift area of the sill flange,
centering the jack saddle inside the cutout in the sill cladding.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel
bolt wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where
the center cap covers the wheel bolts, use
the wheel bolt wrench to pry the center
cap off carefully before raising the
vehicle.
Front Jacking Location
Jacking Locations
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel
bolt wrench to loosen, but not remove, the
wheel bolts on the wheel with the flat tire.
Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove
the flat tire.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary
can make the vehicle less stable. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it.
Raise the vehicle only enough to remove
the tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
Rear Jacking Location
181
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
7. Remove the alignment pin from the jack
assembly and thread the pin into the
wheel hub to assist in mounting the spare
tire.
8. Mount the spare tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the
valve stem facing outward. The vehicle
could be damaged if the spare tire is
mounted incorrectly.
NOTE:
• For vehicles equipped, do not attempt
to install a center cap or wheel cover on
the compact spare.
• Refer to “Compact Spare Tire” and to
“Limited-Use Spare” under “Tires—
General Information” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” in the Owner's Manual
for additional warnings, cautions, and
information about the spare tire, its
use, and operation.
182
9. Install and lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off
the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts
fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury.
10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack handle counterclockwise.
11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push
down on the wrench while at the end of
the handle for increased leverage.
Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern
until each wheel bolt has been tightened
twice. Refer to “Wheel And Tire Torque
Specifications” in “Technical Specifications” for the proper lug bolt torque. If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by
your authorized dealer or at a service
station.
12. Place the jack on the foam tray and open
it far enough so that it is secured. Once
placed in position, rotate it clockwise to
lock it in. Replace the alignment pin in
the center hole to lock the jack in place.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
jack parts and the spare tire in the places
provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the
threaded end of the wheel bolt toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off
the jack, do not tighten the wheel bolts
fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push
down on the wrench while at the end of
the handle for increased leverage. Tighten
the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each
wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Refer to “Wheel And Tire Torque Specifications” in “Technical Specifications” for
the proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt
about the correct tightness, have them
checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the
wheel blocks. Reassemble the lug wrench
to the jack assembly and stow it in the
spare tire area. Secure the assembly using
the means provided. Release the parking
brake before driving the vehicle.
6. After 25 miles (40 km), check the wheel
bolt torque with a torque wrench to ensure
that all wheel bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is stowed under the load
floor behind the rear seat.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor
handle.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF
EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire
Service Kit. Small punctures up to 1/4 inch
(6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with
Tire Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws
or nails) should not be removed from the tire.
Tire Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures down to approximately -4°F
(-20°C). This kit will provide a temporary tire
seal, allowing you to drive your vehicle up to
100 miles (160 km) with a maximum speed
of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Load Floor Handle
183
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Selecting Sealant Mode
Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to
this position to inject the Tire Service Kit
Sealant and to inflate the tire.
Using The Power Button
Tire Service Kit (Bottom View)
Tire Service Kit (Top View)
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Power Plug
Mode Select Knob
Pressure Gauge
Power Switch
Deflation Button
1 — Sealant Bottle
2 — Hose Attachments
3 — Sealant/Air Hose
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the
following symbols to indicate the air or sealant mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and turn to
this position for air pump operation only.
184
Push and release the Power Button once to
turn On the Tire Service Kit. Push and release
the Power Button again to turn Off the Tire
Service Kit.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to reduce the air
pressure in the tire if it becomes over-inflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
• Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle
prior to the expiration date (printed at the
lower right hand corner on the bottle label)
to assure optimum operation of the system.
Refer to “Sealant Bottle Replacement” in
this section.
• The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application
use and needs to be replaced after each
use. Always replace these components immediately at your original equipment vehicle dealer.
• When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a
liquid form, clean water, and a damp cloth
will remove the material from the vehicle or
tire and wheel components. Once the sealant dries, it can easily be peeled off and
properly discarded.
• For optimum performance, make sure the
valve stem on the wheel is free of debris
before connecting the Tire Service Kit.
• You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to
inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with
two needles, located in the Accessory Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the air
pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or
similar inflatable items. However, use only
the Air Pump and make sure the Mode
Select Knob is in the Air Mode when inflating such items to avoid injecting sealant
into them. The Tire Service Kit Sealant is
only intended to seal punctures less than
1/4 inch (6 mm) diameter in the tread of
your vehicle.
• Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the
hoses.
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side
of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when using the Tire Service
Kit.
• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the
vehicle under the following circumstances:
– If the puncture in the tire tread is
approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or
larger.
– If the tire has any sidewall damage.
– If the tire has any damage from
driving with extremely low tire pressure.
– If the tire has any damage from
driving on a flat tire.
– If the wheel has any damage.
– If you are unsure of the condition of
the tire or the wheel.
• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open
flames or heat source.
• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in
a collision or hard stop could endanger
the occupants of the vehicle. Always
WARNING!
stow the Tire Service Kit in the place
provided. Failure to follow these warnings can result in injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and
others around you.
• Take care not to allow the contents of
Tire Service Kit to come in contact with
hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit
sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,
or absorbed through the skin. It causes
skin, eye, and respiratory irritation.
Flush immediately with plenty of water if
there is any contact with eyes or skin.
Change clothing as soon as possible, if
there is any contact with clothing.
• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains latex. In case of an allergic reaction
or rash, consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of reach
of children. If swallowed, rinse mouth
immediately with plenty of water and
drink plenty of water. Do not induce
vomiting! Consult a physician immediately.
185
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service
Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel
with the deflated tire) is in a position that
is near to the ground. This will allow the
Tire Service Kit Hose to reach the valve
stem and keep the Tire Service Kit flat on
the ground. This will provide the best
positioning of the kit when injecting the
sealant into the deflated tire and running
the air pump. Move the vehicle as necessary to place the valve stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK and cycle
the ignition in the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove
the cap from the fitting at the end of the
hose.
186
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground next to the deflated tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within 0
– 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose:
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem and
then screw the fitting at the end of the
Sealant Hose onto the valve stem.
1. Push the Power Button to turn Off the Tire
Service Kit. Disconnect the Sealant Hose
from the valve stem. Make sure the valve
stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
Sealant Hose to the valve stem. Check
that the Mode Select Knob is in the Sealant Mode position and not Air Mode. Push
the Power Button to turn On the Tire
Service Kit.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert the plug
into the vehicle’s 12 Volt power outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into
The Deflated Tire:
1. Always start the vehicle before turning ON
the Tire Service Kit.
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to the
Sealant Mode position.
3. After pushing the Power Button, the sealant (white fluid) will flow from the Sealant
Bottle through the Sealant Hose and into
the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in
the tire.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different
12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or
another vehicle, if available. Make sure
the vehicle is running before turning ON
the Tire Service Kit.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to
previous use. Call for assistance.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump until sealant is no longer flowing through hose
(typically takes 30 - 70 seconds). As the
sealant flows through the Sealant Hose,
the Pressure Gauge can read as high as
70 psi (4.8 Bar). The Pressure Gauge will
decrease quickly from approximately
70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual tire pressure
when the Sealant Bottle is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into the
tire immediately after the Sealant Bottle
is empty. Continue to operate the pump
and inflate the tire to the cold tire inflation pressure found on the tire and loading
information label located in the driverside door opening. Check the tire pressure
by looking at the Pressure Gauge.
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi
(1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
• The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle further. Call for
assistance.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure
or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within
15 minutes:
NOTE:
If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure
to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
1. Push the Power Button to turn off the Tire
Service Kit.
WARNING!
2. Remove the speed limit label from the Tire
Service Kit and place sticker on the steering wheel.
follow this warning can result in injuries
that are serious or fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you. Have the
tire checked as soon as possible at your
authorized dealer.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose
from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on
the fitting at the end of the hose, and
place the Tire Service Kit in the vehicle
storage location. Proceed to “Drive
Vehicle.”
Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle 5 miles
(8 km) or ten minutes to ensure distribution
of the Tire Service Kit Sealant within the tire.
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
WARNING!
Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire
repair. Have the tire inspected and repaired or replaced after using Tire Service
Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) until
the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location. Refer to “Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit” in this
section before continuing.
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove
the cap from the fitting at the end of the
hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the
ground next to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve stem, and
then screw the fitting at the end of the
Sealant Hose onto the valve stem.
4. Uncoil the power plug and insert the plug
into the vehicle's 12 Volt power outlet.
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the fitting at
the end of the hose onto the valve stem.
187
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and turn to
the Air Mode position.
7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading
the Pressure Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt
to drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn on Tire
Service Kit and inflate the tire to the cold
tire inflation pressure found on the tire
and loading information label located in
the driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes over-inflated, push the
Deflation Button to reduce the tire pressure to the recommended inflation pressure before continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve
stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper
storage area in the vehicle.
188
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced at the earliest opportunity at
your authorized dealer or tire service
center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the
steering wheel after the tire has been
repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at your authorized dealer as soon as possible. Refer to
“Sealant Bottle Replacement”.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the
authorized dealer or service center that the
tire has been sealed using the Tire Service
Kit.
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
1. Unwrap the power cord.
2. Unwrap the hose.
3. Remove the bottle cover.
4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to
release.
5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.
NOTE:
• For sealant bottle installation, follow these
steps reverse order.
• Replacement sealant bottles are available
at authorized service centers.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so
please follow the procedures in this section
carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery
is frozen. It could rupture or explode and
cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack
or any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK (manual
transmission in NEUTRAL) and turn the
ignition to OFF/LOCK.
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the
front of the engine compartment, behind the
left headlight assembly.
NOTE:
The positive battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain
access to the post.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
Positive Battery Post
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling
fan whenever the hood is raised. It can
start anytime the ignition switch is ON.
You can be injured by moving fan blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact.
You could be seriously injured.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, set the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF/LOCK.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other
as this could establish a ground connection and personal injury could result.
189
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure could result in personal injury or
property damage due to battery explosion.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable to a good engine ground
(exposed metal part of the discharged
vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has
the booster battery, let the engine idle for
a few minutes, and then start the engine
in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the
jumper cables in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the
jumper cable from the engine ground of
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
190
WARNING!
the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed
metal parts.
Suitable Engine Ground
(Example Engine Shown)
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper cable from the negative (-)
post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+)
post of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start
your vehicle, you should have the battery and
charging system inspected at your authorized
dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine
operation, the vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY
The fuel filling procedure in case of emergency is described in the “Emergency Gas
Can Refueling”. Refer to “Refueling The Vehicle” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
IF YOUR ENGINE
OVERHEATS
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow
down an impending overheat condition:
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating your engine by taking the appropriate action.
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, place the
transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature
gauge reads “H,” pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
• You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor
and the blower control to high. This allows
the heater core to act as a supplement to
the radiator and aids in removing heat from
the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant
bottle is hot.
191
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
selector. Then shift back and forth between
DRIVE and REVERSE (for automatic transmission) or SECOND GEAR and REVERSE
(for manual transmission) while gently pressing the accelerator.
If a malfunction occurs, and the gear selector
cannot be moved out of the PARK position,
you can use the following procedure to temporarily move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Apply the park brake.
3. Grasp the boot material rearward of the
gear selector and pull up to carefully
separate the gear selector bezel and boot
assembly from the center console.
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool
down into the gear selector override access hole (at the right rear corner of the
gear selector assembly), and push and
hold the override release lever down.
192
Gear Selector Override Access Hole
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL
position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in
NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector boot.
NOTE:
For vehicles with automatic transmission,
shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can
only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL for more than two seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels or racing the
engine.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
WARNING!
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand
or snow, it can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering wheel right and
left to clear the area around the front wheels.
For vehicles with automatic transmission,
push and hold the lock button on the gear
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.
Forces generated by excessive wheel
speeds may cause damage, or even failure,
of the axle and tires. A tire could explode
and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
WARNING!
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping when you
are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
NOTE:
Push the “ESC Off” switch (if necessary), to
place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
system in “Partial Off” mode, before rocking
the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in “Safety” in the Owner’s
Manual for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the "ESC Off"
switch again to restore “ESC On” mode.
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the
wheels may lead to transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to
idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five
rocking-motion cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce the risk of
clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/SECOND gear and
REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
CAUTION!
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the
wheels too fast may lead to transmission
overheating and failure. It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear
(no transmission shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Flatbed
Wheels OFF The
Ground
NONE
Rear
Front
ALL
FWD MODELS
4X4 MODELS
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
OK
BEST METHOD
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
NOT ALLOWED
ONLY METHOD
193
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required
to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only
tow bars and other equipment designed for
this purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing
devices to main structural members of the
vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
NOTE:
• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake
feature is disabled before towing this vehicle to avoid inadvertent Electric Park
Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake
feature is enabled or disabled via the customer programmable features in the
Uconnect Settings.
• Vehicles with a discharged battery, or total
electrical failure when the electric park
brake (EPB) is engaged, will need a wheel
dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels off the
ground when moving the vehicle onto a
flatbed.
194
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode.
Note that the Safehold feature will engage
the Electric Park Brake whenever the driver's
door is opened (if the battery is connected,
ignition is ON, transmission is not in PARK,
and brake pedal is released). If you are towing this vehicle with the ignition in the ON/
RUN mode, you must manually disable the
Electric Park Brake each time the driver's
door is opened by pressing the brake pedal
and then releasing the EPB.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged, refer to
“Gear Selector Override” in this section for
instructions on shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK so that the vehicle can
be moved.
CAUTION!
your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while
being towed.
Without The Key Fob
Special care must be taken when the vehicle
is towed with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF
mode. The only approved method of towing
without the key fob is with a flatbed truck.
Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models — With
Key Fob
CAUTION!
The manufacturer recommends towing your
vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground
using a flatbed.
• Do not use sling-type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
• When securing the vehicle to a flatbed
truck, do not attach to front or rear
suspension components. Damage to
If flatbed equipment is not available, this
vehicle must be towed with the front wheels
OFF the ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel
lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remains released, while being
towed. The Electric Park Brake does not need
to be released if all four wheels are off the
ground.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the
above requirements can cause severe engine and/or transmission damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
4x4 Models
The manufacturer requires towing with all
four wheels OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on
a flatbed, or with one end of the vehicle
raised and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used
(if the remaining wheels are on the
ground). Internal damage to the transmission or transfer case will occur if a
front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the
above requirements can cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case damage. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Emergency Tow Hooks
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks,
there will be one in the rear and two mounted
on the front of the vehicle. The rear hook will
be located on the driver's side of the vehicle.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to
use both of the front tow hooks to minimize
the risk of damage to the vehicle.
Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,
and subsequently in OFF/LOCK, without
opening the door. During towing, remember
that not having the aid of the power brakes
and the electromechanical power steering
will require greater force when applying the
brakes and steering of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling
with tow hooks. Tow straps may become
disengaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to
rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not
use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or
highway towing. You could damage your
vehicle.
195
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ENHANCED ACCIDENT
RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information on
the Enhanced Accident Response System
(EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER
(EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed
under certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information on
the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
196
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING . . . . . .198
Maintenance Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
ENGINE COMPARTMENT . . . . .200
2.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . .
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . .
Maintenance-Free Battery . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.200
.201
.201
.201
DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . .202
Air Conditioner Maintenance
Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . .
Cooling System . . . . . . . .
Brake System . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.202
.203
.203
.204
Manual Transmission — If Equipped . .205
Automatic Transmission —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY
GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
RAISING THE VEHICLE . . . . . . .205
Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . .222
TIRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Tire Safety Information . . . . .
Tires — General Information . .
Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tires — If Equipped . . .
Tire Chains (Traction Devices). .
Tire Rotation Recommendations
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.205
.213
.217
.218
.219
.220
INTERIORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Seats And Fabric Parts . .
Plastic And Coated Parts.
Leather Parts. . . . . . . .
Glass Surfaces . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.222
.223
.223
.224
197
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is time to take
your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate in the
instrument cluster. This means that service is
required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow and
extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures
will influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil
Change Required” message is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the
change oil message to illuminate as early as
3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible,
within the next 500 miles (805 km).
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil
change indicator message after completing
the scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil
change is performed by someone other than
your authorized dealer, the message can be
reset by referring to the steps described under “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s Manual for further information.
198
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
one year or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of
engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km)
or 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off road environment or
is operated predominately at idle or only very
low engine RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
NOTE:
The Oil Change Indicator will not illuminate
under these conditions.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level.
• Check windshield washer fluid level.
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look
for unusual wear or damage.
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, and brake master cylinder reservoir,
and fill as needed.
• Check function of all interior and exterior
lights.
Maintenance Plan
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” on the following page for the required maintenance intervals.
Required Maintenance Intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil
Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter
Rotate the tires
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it
occurs before the oil indicator system turns on
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums,
and hoses
Inspect engine cooling system protection
and hoses
Inspect exhaust system
Inspect engine air filter if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years:
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road conditions, inspect the air cleaner filter,
and replace if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals, replace if necessary.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the CV joints.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler pulley, and replace if necessary.
X
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Replace spark plugs.*
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
X
X
X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary.
* The spark plug change interval is mileage
based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
X
X
WARNING!
work for which you have the knowledge
and the right equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
WARNING!
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an
accident.
199
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.4L Engine
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter
2 — Engine Oil Fill Cap
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir
200
4 — Battery
5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
7 — Coolant Pressure Cap
8 — Coolant Pressure Bottle
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine
oil must be maintained at the correct level.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as
once a month or before a long trip. The best
time to check the engine oil level is approximately five minutes after a fully warmed engine
is shut off. Do not check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground, and approximately five minutes after
a fully warmed engine is shut off, will improve
the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the range markings
on the dipstick. The safe range is indicated
by a crosshatch zone. Adding 1 quart (0.9 Liters) of oil when the reading is at the low end
of the indicated range will result in the oil
level at the full end of the indicator range.
CAUTION!
• Overfilling or underfilling will cause oil
aeration, or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
• Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of
the engine compartment. Be sure to check
the fluid level in the reservoir at regular
intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
washer solvent (not radiator antifreeze) and
operate the system for a few seconds to flush
out the residual washer fluid.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid, apply it to a cloth or towel,
and wipe clean the wiper blades; this will
help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield
washer system in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or exceeds the
temperature range of your climate. This rating information can be found on most washer
fluid containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite
and burn you. Care must be exercised
when filling or working around the washer
solution.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenancefree battery. You will never have to add water,
nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution
and can burn or even blind you. Do not
allow battery fluid to contact your eyes,
skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a
battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the
area immediately with large amounts of
water. Refer to “Jump Starting Proce-
201
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
dure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or
any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables
on the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the
negative cable is attached to the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the battery case. Cable clamps
should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both
202
CAUTION!
vehicle battery cables before connecting
the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
WARNING!
and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment
to perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner should be checked and serviced by
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning
of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor
lubricants approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system.
Some unapproved refrigerants are flammable and can explode, injuring you.
Other unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty
WARNING!
Information Book, located in your owner’s information kit, for further warranty
information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid
risk of personal injury or damage to the
system, adding refrigerant or any repair
requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
mends that air conditioning service be performed by an authorized dealer or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling
equipment.
before turning them on to avoid damaging the
blade. Keep the wiper blade out of contact
with petroleum products such as engine oil,
gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending on geographical area and frequency
of use. Poor performance of blades may be
present with chattering, marks, water lines or
wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
A/C Air Filter
See an authorized dealer for service.
Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades
and the windshield and rear window periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild
nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and
help reduce streaking and smearing.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a
— If Equipped
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using
the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield or rear window.
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an ozonefriendly substance. The manufacturer recom-
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost
or ice from the windshield or rear window.
Make sure that they are not frozen to the glass
Cooling System
WARNING!
• You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam
from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, do
not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator or
coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
203
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
the hood is raised. The fan starts automatically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling
fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or
turn the ignition to the OFF mode. The
fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON
mode.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine
coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appearance, the system should be drained, flushed
and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser
for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If
dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the
condenser.
204
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be inspected periodically. Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your
foot resting or riding on the brake pedal
can result in abnormally high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and possible brake damage. You would not have
your full braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be
checked when performing under hood services or immediately if the “Brake Warning
Light” is illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to
the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level
can be expected to fall as the brake pads
wear. Brake fluid level should be checked
when pads are replaced. However, low fluid
level may be caused by a leak and a checkup
may be needed.
Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants”
in “Technical Specifications” for further
information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information. Using the wrong
type of brake fluid can severely damage
your brake system and/or impair its performance. The proper type of brake fluid
for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign
matter or moisture, use only new brake
fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly
WARNING!
closed container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs
moisture from the air resulting in a lower
boiling point. This may cause it to boil
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing the brake fluid to
catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should
be taken to avoid its contact with these
surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This
could result in a collision.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill
plug. The fluid level should be between the
bottom of the fill hole and a point not more
than 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) below the bottom of
the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper
level.
Please see your authorized dealer for service.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and
does not require adjustment under normal
operating conditions. Routine fluid level
checks are not required; therefore the transmission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer
can check your transmission fluid level using
special service tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating
the vehicle with an improper fluid level can
cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the
vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service
station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of
the following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
205
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based
on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires
have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
P215/65R15 95H.
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT
Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service
Description
206
4 — Maximum
Load
5 — Maximum
Pressure
6 — Treadwear,
Traction and
Temperature
Grades
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed to
this standard have the tire size molded into
the sidewall beginning with the section width.
The letter "P" is absent from this tire size
designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is
based on U.S. design standards. The size
designation for LT-Metric tires is the same
as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high
pressure compact spare tires have the letter
“T” or “S” molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
• Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
• "R" means radial construction, or
• "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
• A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
• A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
• The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
207
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of
the tire; however, the date code may only be on
one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have
the full TIN, including the date code, located
on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for
the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is
not found on the outboard side, then you will
find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
• This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 03 means the 3rd week
208
EXAMPLE:
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
• 01 means the year 2001
• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front
door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting
for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds
per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity,
the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
209
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
This placard tells you important information
about the:
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is
listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear
edge of the driver's side door.
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
210
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must
not exceed the load carrying capacity of the
tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the
tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in “Vehicle
Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of your Owner’s Manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the
front and rear axles must not be exceeded.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your vehicle, locate the statement
“The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/
luggage and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of
your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and size of occupants.
This table is for illustration purposes only
and may not be accurate for the seating and
load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
211
212
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle.
Never overload them.
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by
improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous
and can cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of
your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of
the vehicle to the other can cause the
vehicle to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to
the recommended cold tire inflation
pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect
the stability of the vehicle and can produce a
feeling of sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side
may cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
213
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring
and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is
listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge
of the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
214
Inflation pressures specified on the placard
are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold
tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of
three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to
a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking
tire pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F
(20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F
(0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure
should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for
this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT
reduce this normal pressure build up or your
tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may be required for high-speed
vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types
of tires on your vehicle will cause your
vehicle to handle poorly. The instability
could cause a collision. Always use radial
ply tires in sets of four. Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat
tire of identical size and service description
(Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after
a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid
loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat
mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi
(96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the
run flat mode it has limited driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immediately. A
Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle
loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while
a tire is in the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In
Case Of Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.
Forces generated by excessive wheel
speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A
tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and
do not let anyone near a spinning wheel,
no matter what the speed.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
215
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
normal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replacement.
• Distance driven.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating
of V or higher, and Summer tires typically
have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these
tires per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
These indicators are molded into the bottom
of the tread grooves. They will appear as
bands when the tread depth becomes a
1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire
should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement
Tires” in this section for further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These ab-
216
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can
result in sudden tire failure. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place
with as little exposure to light as possible.
Protect tires from contact with oil, grease,
and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires
equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed.
Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size designation of
your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol
for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in
the “Tire Safety Information” section of this
manual for more information relating to the
Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just
one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with
any questions you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating,
or speed rating other than that specified
for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may
change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in
changes to steering, handling, and braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You
could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index
or capacity, other than what was originally equipped on your vehicle. Using a
tire with a smaller load index could re-
WARNING!
sult in tire overloading and failure. You
could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter).
Traction levels may vary between different all
season tires. All season tires can be identified
by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in
sets of four; failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet
and dry conditions, and are not intended to
be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your
vehicle when ambient temperatures are less
than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with
ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol
on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in
sets of four; failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving
too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
217
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can
be identified by a “mountain/snowflake”
symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires,
select tires equivalent
in size and type to the
original
equipment
tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four;
failure to do so may
adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
218
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of nonstudded tires. Some states prohibit studded
tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire
Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” in
the Owner’s Manual for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance,
do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or limited
use temporary spare installed. Damage to
the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare
tire and wheel equivalent in look and function to the original equipment tire and wheel
found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this
option, refer to an authorized tire dealer for
the recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only. You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare by
looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening or on the
sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original equipment tire should be repaired (or
replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at
the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to
mount a conventional tire on the compact
spare wheel, since the wheel is designed
specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not
install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary
use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure
to follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only. This tire may look like the
originally equipped tire on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the
tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
temporary use full size spare tire needs to be
replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on
the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by
a label located on the limited use spare
wheel. This label contains the driving limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of
this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on
the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the
rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace
(or repair) the original equipment tire at
the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss
of vehicle control.
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tireto-body clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard against damage:
• Traction device must be of proper size for
the tire, as recommended by the traction
device manufacturer.
• Install on front tires only.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire,
do not drive more than the speed listed on
the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated
to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard
• For a 215/65R16 tire, use of a snow traction device with a maximum projection of
7 mm beyond the tire profile is recommended.
• No other tire sizes are recommended for
use with a tire chain or traction device.
219
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Using tires of different size and type
(M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles
can cause unpredictable handling. You
could lose control and have a collision.
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns
and large bumps, especially with a
loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on
dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instructions on the method of installation, operating speed, and conditions
for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device manufacturer’s
if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
• Because of restricted traction device
clearance between tires and other suspension components, it is important
that only traction devices in good condition are used. Broken devices can cause
serious damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove the damaged parts of the device before further
use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different steering, handling, and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires. The benefits of rotation are
especially worthwhile with aggressive tread
designs such as those on On/Off Road type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to
maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels,
and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the
proper maintenance intervals. The reasons
for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed.
The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rotation method is the “forward cross” shown in
the following diagram. This rotation pattern
does not apply to some directional tires that
must not be reversed.
Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Tire Rotation
220
The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire
rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram.
Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire Rotation
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends on tires of equal size, type
and circumference on each wheel. Any
difference in tire size can cause damage to
the power transfer unit. Tire rotation
schedule should be followed to balance
tire wear.
DEPARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY
GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices,
and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These
grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement, as measured
under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on straight-ahead braking
traction tests, and does not include
acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
221
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire's resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat,
when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all passenger vehicle tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
222
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or
excessive loading, either separately
or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable, and if used in closed areas they
may cause respiratory harm.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the
following manner:
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by
blotting with a clean, dry towel.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean,
damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean,
or a mild soap solution to a clean, damp
cloth and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp
towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply Mopar MultiPurpose Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and
remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other
form of protectants on Stain Repel
products.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This
will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry
with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or
worn or if the buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system. Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Leather Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for leather upholstery.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may cause
permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.
• Damage caused by these type of products may not be covered by your New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap
solution may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If
soap is used, wipe clean with a clean
damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp
cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily
with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care
should be taken to avoid soaking your leather
upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean
your leather upholstery. Application of a
leather conditioner is not required to maintain the original condition.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends
to show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric
dye transfer more so than darker colors. The
leather is designed for easy cleaning, and
FCA recommends Mopar total care leather
cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather
seats as needed.
223
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based
and/or Ketone based cleaning products to
clean leather seats, as damage to the seat
may result.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or
any commercial household-type glass
cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner.
Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or
windows equipped with radio antennas. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are
using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the
mirror.
224
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA . . . . . . .226
FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . .227
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS. . . . .229
Vehicle Identification Number . . . . . .226
2.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . .228
Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . .227
Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . .227
FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . .229
MOPAR ACCESSORIES . . . . . . .230
Authentic Accessories By Mopar . . . . .230
225
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
IDENTIFICATION DATA
Vehicle Identification Number
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is
found on the left front corner of the windshield and is visible from the outside of the
vehicle. The VIN number also is stamped into
the right front body, on the front floor. With
the passenger seat in the rear most position,
a door in the carpet can be opened to reveal
the VIN. It also appears on the Automobile
Information Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your vehicle, the vehicle registration,
and the title.
Vehicle Identification Number
Right Front Body VIN Location
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
226
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug
nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a high quality
six sided (hex) deep wall socket.
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern
until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
Ensure that the socket is fully engaged on the
lug nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway).
NOTE:
If in doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by your
authorized dealer or service station.
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off
the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure
to follow this warning may result in personal injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
100 Ft-Lbs
(135 N·m)
WARNING!
2.4L Engine
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
M12 x 1.25
19 mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove
any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion
or loose particles.
Torque Pattern
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/
bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/
bolts are properly seated against the wheel.
All available gasoline
engines are designed
to meet all emissions
regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy and performance when using
high quality unleaded
“regular” gasoline having a octane rating of
87 using the (R+M)/2 method. The use of
premium gasoline is not recommended, as it
will not provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
227
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a
heavy knocking sound, see your dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower than 87 can cause engine failure
and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems
such as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try
another brand of gasoline before considering
service for the vehicle.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Gasoline with higher ethanol content
may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
228
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled
with E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or
all of these symptoms:
• Operate in a lean mode.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
• Poor engine performance.
• Poor cold start and cold drivability.
• Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion.
Materials Added To Fuel
Designated TOP TIER
Detergent
Gasoline
contains a higher level
of detergents to further aide in minimizing engine and fuel
system deposits. When
available, the usage of
Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recommended.
Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials.
FLUID CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
2.4 Liter Gasoline Engine
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4 Liter Gasoline Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified)
Cooling System*
2.4 Liter Gasoline Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
Metric
13.5 Gallons
51 Liters
5.5 Quarts
5.2 Liters
6.8 Quarts
6.5 Liters
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil – 2.4 Liter Engine
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection – 2.4 Liter Engine
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 Kilometers) Formula OAT
(Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE
grade.
We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.
We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol
229
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Chassis
Component
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (FWD
Models) – If Equipped
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission
(4WD Models) – If Equipped
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped
Rear Differential (RDM) – If Equipped
Brake Master Cylinder
Refrigerant
Compressor Oil
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use Mopar C Series Manual & Dual Dry Clutch Transmission Fluid.
Use only Mopar AW-1 Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may
affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct
fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
We recommended you use Mopar Front Axle/PTU Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).
We recommended you use Mopar Rear Axle/RDM Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3. If DOT 3 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Use Only Refrigerant R134a
Charge Amounts:
2.4L Engines — 567g (1.25lb)
Use Only PAG Oil RL-897
2.4L Engines — 135ml (4.56oz)
MOPAR ACCESSORIES
Authentic Accessories By Mopar
• The following highlights just some of the
many Authentic Jeep Accessories by Mopar
featuring a fit, finish, and functionality
specifically for your Jeep Vehicle.
230
• In choosing Authentic Accessories you gain
far more than expressive style, premium
protection, or extreme entertainment, you
also benefit from enhancing your vehicle
with accessories that have been thoroughly
tested and factory-approved.
• For the full line of Authentic Jeep Accessories by Mopar, visit your local dealership or
online at mopar.com for U.S. residents and
mopar.ca for Canadian residents.
NOTE:
All parts are subject to availability.
EXTERIOR:
• Rock Rails
• Wheels
• Wheel Locks
• License Plate Frames
• Towing Accessories
•
•
•
•
Front End Cover
Splash Guards
Locking Gas Cap
Valve Stem Covers
• Hood And Bodyside Decals
• Air Deflectors
• Hitch Receiver
INTERIOR:
• Premium Floor Mats
• Security Covers
• All-Weather Mats
• Cargo Net
•
•
•
•
Roadside Safety Kit
Bright Pedal Kit
Door Sill Guards
Cargo Management Accessories
• Molded Cargo Tray
• Katzkin Leather Interiors
• Cargo Mat
ELECTRONICS:
• Remote Start
• Speaker Upgrades
• Electronic Vehicle Tracking System
• Roof-mount Ski and Snowboard Carrier
• Roof-mount Watersports Carrier
• Cross Rails
• Roof-mount Bike Carriers
• Roof Cargo Box Carrier
• Roof-mount Canoe Carrier
CARRIERS:
• Hitch-mount Bike Carrier
• Roof Top Cargo Basket
• Roof Rails
• Roof-mount Surfboard Carrier
231
232
MULTIMEDIA
MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY . . . . . . . . . . .235
TIPS CONTROLS AND GENERAL
INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
Reception Conditions . . . . . .
Care And Maintenance . . . . .
Anti-Theft Protection . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.236
.236
.236
.236
SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped
(Available on Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
With 8.4–inch Display) . . . . . . . . .
SiriusXM Guardian Activation . . . .
Download The Uconnect App . . . . .
Renewing Subscriptions (Uconnect
4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display). .
Maintaining Your SiriusXM Guardian
Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Built-In Features . . . . . . . . . . . .
SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features
. .237
. .238
. .238
. .239
. .239
. .239
. .242
UCONNECT 3 WITH 5–INCH
DISPLAY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .244
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display At
Glance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clock Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Audio Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .
USB/Audio Jack (AUX)/Bluetooth
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Text Reply (Not Compatible
With iPhone) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A
. .
. .
. .
. .
.244
.245
.245
.246
. . . . .258
. . . . .259
. . . . .261
. . . . .264
. . .246
UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . .266
. . .247
NAVIGATION — IF EQUIPPED. . .267
UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH
DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249
Uconnect 4 At A Glance . . . .
Drag & Drop Menu Bar . . . . . .
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Media Hub — USB/Audio Jack
(AUX) — If Equipped . . . . . . .
Android Auto — If Equipped . .
Apple CarPlay Integration —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Media Hub — USB/Audio Jack
(AUX) — If Equipped . . . . . . .
Android Auto — If Equipped . .
Apple CarPlay Integration —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . .249
. . . . .250
. . . . .251
. . . . .252
. . . . .254
. . . . .255
UCONNECT 4C/4C NAV WITH
8.4–INCH DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . .256
Uconnect 4/4C NAV At A Glance . . . .256
Drag & Drop Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . .257
Changing The Navigation Voice
Prompt Volume . . . . . . . . . . .
Finding Points Of Interest . . . .
Finding A Place By Spelling The
Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
One-Step Voice Destination Entry
Setting Your Home Location . . .
Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding A Stop . . . . . . . . . . . .
Taking A Detour . . . . . . . . . . .
SiriusXM Traffic Plus (4C NAV) .
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) . .
. . . .267
. . . .269
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.269
.269
.269
.269
.271
.271
.271
.271
UCONNECT PHONE . . . . . . . . .273
233
MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands
Free Calling) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your
Mobile Phone To The Uconnect
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Common Phone Commands
(Examples) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone
During Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Transfer Ongoing Call Between
Handset And Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
Phonebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Command Tips . . . . . . . . . .
Changing The Volume . . . . . . . . .
Using Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . .
234
. .273
. .276
. .280
. .280
.
.
.
.
.
.280
.280
.280
.280
.280
Incoming Text Messages . . . . . . . . .281
Helpful Tips And Common Questions
To Improve Bluetooth Performance
With Your Uconnect System . . . . . . .282
UCONNECT VOICE
RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS . . . .283
Introducing Uconnect .
Get Started . . . . . . . .
Basic Voice Commands.
Radio . . . . . . . . . . .
Media . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone . . . . . . . . . . .
Voice Text Reply . . . . .
Climate . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.283
.284
.284
.284
.285
.286
.287
.287
Navigation (4C NAV) . . . . . . . . .
SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV)—
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Register (4C/4C NAV). . . . . . . . .
Vehicle Health Report/Alert
(4C/4C NAV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV). . . . . . .
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) . . .
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . .
Using Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . .
Android Auto — If Equipped . . . .
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped . . . .
General Information. . . . . . . . . .
Additional Information . . . . . . . .
. . .288
. . .289
. . .289
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.289
.290
.290
.290
.291
.292
.292
.293
.293
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These networks allow your vehicle to send and receive information. This
information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle systems and wireless communications. Vehicle
software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps
as needed. Similar to a computer or other
devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and performance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access
to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if
the most recent version of vehicle software
(such as Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all
of the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are breached. It may be
possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be impaired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card,
or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it
may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to
your nearest authorized dealer immediately.
• To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
– Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/
support/software-update.html (U.S. Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) to learn about available Uconnect software updates.
– Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communications cannot be assured. Third parties may
unlawfully intercept information and private
communications without your consent. For
further information, refer to ”Data Collection
& Privacy” in your Uconnect Owners Manual
Supplement or “Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s
Manual.
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
235
MULTIMEDIA
TIPS CONTROLS AND
GENERAL INFORMATION
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
The steering wheel audio controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel.
• Push the button in the center to select the
next preset station on the radio.
• Never use alcohol, gas and derivatives to
clean the display lens.
Right Switch
• Prevent any liquid from entering the system: this could damage it beyond repair.
• Push the switch up or down to increase or
decrease the volume.
• Push the button in the center to change
modes AM/FM/SXM or Media.
Reception Conditions
Reception conditions change constantly
while driving. Reception may be interfered
with by the presence of mountains, buildings
or bridges, especially when you are far away
from the broadcaster.
The volume may be increased when receiving
traffic alerts and news.
Care And Maintenance
Steering Wheel Audio Controls
Left Switch
• Push the switch up or down to search for
the next listenable station or select the next
or previous Media track.
236
Observe the following precautions to ensure
the system is fully operational:
• The display lens should not come into contact with pointed or rigid objects which
could damage its surface; use a soft, dry
anti-static cloth to clean and do not press.
Anti-Theft Protection
The system is equipped with an anti-theft
protection system based on the exchange of
information with the electronic control unit
(Body Computer) on the vehicle.
This guarantees maximum safety and prevents the secret code from being entered
after the power supply has been disconnected.
If the check has a positive outcome, the
system will start to operate, whereas if the
comparison codes are not the same or if the
electronic control unit (Body Computer) is
replaced, the system will ask the user to enter
the secret code. See an authorized dealer for
further information.
SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN — IF
EQUIPPED
• Place a SOS Call to a SiriusXM Guardian
operator who can connect you to emergency
responders.
SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped
(Available on Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With
8.4–inch Display)
• Remotely lock/unlock your doors and start
your vehicle from virtually anywhere, using
the Uconnect App from your device. You
can also do so by logging into your owner
site, or by calling SiriusXM Guardian Care
when your vehicle has an operable network
connection. Services can only be used
where coverage is available.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with
your hands on the steering wheel. You have
full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the
features and applications when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
SiriusXM Guardian enhances your ownership
and driving experience. When connected to
an operable network, you can:
• Receive text or email notifications if your
vehicle's security alarm goes off.
• Receive stolen vehicle assistance, using
GPS technology to help authorities locate
your vehicle if it is stolen.
• Get operator assistance using the ASSIST
button on your interior rearview mirror.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the
easy-to-use SiriusXM Guardian services.
1. The ASSIST and SOS Call buttons are
located on your rearview mirror. The ASSIST button is used for contacting Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, SiriusXM
Guardian Care, and Uconnect Care. The
SOS Call button connects you to a
SiriusXM Guardian Care Agent, who can
connect you to emergency services.
” button is lo2. The Uconnect “Apps
cated in the center of the menu bar of the
radio touchscreen. This is where you can
manage your Apps.
3. The Uconnect Voice Command and
Uconnect Phone buttons are located on
the left side of your steering wheel. These
buttons let you use your voice to give
commands, make phone calls, send and
receive text messages, enter navigation
destinations, and control your radio and
media devices.
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included
trial period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian
services starting at the date of vehicle purchase (date based on vehicle sales notification from your dealer). To activate the trial, you
must first register with SiriusXM Guardian. After the trial period, if you wish to continue
your SiriusXM Guardian services you can
choose to purchase a subscription.
237
MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
You can check UconnectPhone.com for system and device compatibility.
• Find your vehicle, no matter where you
parked, using the convenient Vehicle
Finder function.
SiriusXM Guardian Activation
• Use Send & Go to send a navigation route
from your mobile phone to your vehicle’s
navigation system.
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM
Guardian in your vehicle, you must activate
your SiriusXM Guardian services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from
your list of apps.
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a
SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent
who will activate services in your vehicle,
or select “Enter Email” to activate on the
web.
Why sign up for SiriusXM Guardian? Here are
just a few examples of things you’ll be able to
do:
• Know that help, if you need it, is only a
button press away with Assist.
• Lock and unlock your vehicle doors from
hundreds of miles away.
238
For further information:.
• U.S. residents visit:
www.siriusxm.com/guardian
• Canadian residents visit:
www.siriusxm.ca/guardian
Download The Uconnect App
You’re only a few steps away from using
remote commands and other valuable services.
Mobile App
To use the Uconnect App:
• Search for and download the Uconnect App
from the store on your compatible iPhone or
Android powered device.
• Log in to the app using the email address
and password you created when you activated the services.
• Press the “Remote” button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to Lock/Unlock, Remote Start (if equipped), and activate your
horn and lights remotely.
• Press the “Location” button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to bring up a map to
locate your vehicle or send a location to
your vehicle’s navigation system.
• Press the menu button (three horizontal
lines) in the upper left corner of the app to
access settings and support information.
Renewing Subscriptions (Uconnect 4C/4C
NAV With 8.4-inch Display)
Subscriptions can be purchased online by logging into your owner account. If you need help
push the ASSIST button on the rearview mirror,
then select SiriusXM Guardian Care or:
• U.S. residents dial:1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents dial:1-877-324-9091
Maintaining Your SiriusXM Guardian
Account
Selling Your Vehicle
When you sell your vehicle, we recommend that
you remove your SiriusXM Guardian Account
information from the vehicle. You can do this by
pressing the ASSIST button in your vehicle and
selecting SiriusXM Guardian, or call:
• U.S. residents:1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents:1-877-324-9091
Built-In Features
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian
services, and applications in this vehicle.
Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so.
Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
• ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the road. Some features are limited while the vehicle is in motion. Some
services, including SOS, will NOT work
without a subscription and an operable
network connection.
• Ignoring the rearview mirror light could
mean you may not have SOS Call service if
WARNING!
needed. If the rearview mirror light is
illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the SOS Call system immediately.
• The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light on the instrument panel if a malfunction is detected in any part of the
airbag system. If the Air Bag Warning
Light is illuminated, the air bag system
may not be working properly and the
SOS Call system may not send a signal to
a SOS Call operator if an air bag is
deployed. If the Air Bag Warning Light is
illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service your vehicle immediately.
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in
danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible,
dangerous road conditions or location),
do not wait for voice contact from a SOS
Call operator. All occupants should exit
the vehicle immediately and move to a
safe location.
• The SOS Call system is embedded into
the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not
add aftermarket electrical equipment to
239
MULTIMEDIA
WARNING!
the vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal to initiate an emergency call. To
avoid interference that can cause the
SOS Call system to fail, never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way mobile
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to
your vehicle’s electrical system or
modify the antennas on your vehicle.
• IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), the Uconnect features, apps,
and SiriusXM Guardian services, among
others, will not operate.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
1. ASSIST Call (4C/4C NAV) — If Equipped —
The rearview mirror contains an ASSIST
button, allowing you to speak to a call
center agent for support:
Assist And SOS
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
• Roadside Assistance Call — If you get a
flat tire, or need a tow, you’ll be connected to someone who can help anytime. Additional fees may apply. Additional information in this section.
• Uconnect Care — In vehicle support for
Uconnect Apps and Features.
• SiriusXM Guardian Care — In vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian services.
• Vehicle Care — Total support for your
FCA US LLC vehicle.
240
NOTE:
In order to provide SiriusXM Guardian Services to you, we may record and monitor your
conversations with Roadside Assistance,
Uconnect Care, SiriusXM Guardian Care, or
Vehicle Care, whether such conversations are
initiated through the SiriusXM Guardian services in your vehicle, your device, or via a
landline device, and may share information
obtained through such recording and monitoring in accordance with regulatory requirements. You acknowledge, agree, and consent
to any recording, monitoring or sharing of
information obtained through any such call
recordings.
2. Emergency SOS Call (If Equipped) — The
rearview mirror contains a SOS Call button that, when pressed, may place a call
from your vehicle to a SiriusXM Guardian
Care operator, who can connect you to
emergency service operators, to request
help from local police, fire or ambulance
personnel. If this button is accidentally
pressed, you will have ten seconds to stop
the call. To cancel, press the SOS Call
button again or press the “Cancel” button
shown on the touchscreen. After ten sec-
onds has passed, the SOS call will be
placed and only the SOS Call operator can
cancel it. The LED light on the rearview
mirror will turn green once a connection to
a SOS Call operator has been made. The
green LED light will turn off once the SOS
Call is terminated. Have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle if the rearview
mirror light is continuously red. On
equipped vehicles, this feature requires a
functioning electrical system, a subscription, and an operable network connection.
If a connection is made between a SOS Call
operator and your vehicle, you understand
and agree that SOS Call operators will stay on
the line, even after you connect with emergency services. The Emergency services operator may, like any other emergency call,
record conversations and sounds in and near
your vehicle upon connection.
3. Theft Alarm Notification — If Equipped —
The Theft Alarm Notification feature notifies you via email or text (SMS) message
when the vehicle’s factory-installed security alarm system has been triggered.
There are a number of reasons why your
alarm may have been triggered, one of
which could be that your vehicle was stolen. If so, please see the details of the
Stolen Vehicle Assistance service below.
When activated, Theft Alarm Notification
is automatically set to send you an email
at the email address you provide should
the alarm go off. You may also opt to have
a text message sent to your device.
4. Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If your vehicle
is stolen, contact local law enforcement
immediately to file a stolen vehicle report.
Once this report has been filed, SiriusXM
Guardian Care can help locate your vehicle. The SiriusXM Guardian Care agent
will ask for the stolen vehicle report number issued by local law enforcement. As
long as your vehicle has a SiriusXM Guardian subscription and an operable network
connection, the agent may be able to
locate the stolen vehicle and work with
law enforcement to help recover it. Your
vehicle must have an operable network
connection and must be registered with
SiriusXM Guardian with an active subscription that includes the applicable
feature.
5. 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped — Allows
you and your passengers to connect their
portable devices to the built-in 4G Wi-Fi
capabilities of your Uconnect system. Purchasing 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot requires the use
of an Internet-enabled portable device.
NOTE:
Uconnect offers a complimentary 3–month
trial period that includes 1GB of total data.
The trial can be activated any time within
the first year of new vehicle ownership.
a. To start, the Enable Wi-Fi Hotspot box
should be un-checked.
b. Select the Wi-Fi Hotspot Setup option
from the toushcreeen to locate your
Hotspot Name and Password. Make
note of this information.
c. Tap the Back Arrow to return to the
main Wi-Fi Hotspot page, then check
the box to Enable Wi-Fi Hotspot.
d. From your portable device Wi-Fi settings menu, select the Hotspot Name
from the list of available networks and
enter the provided Password.
241
MULTIMEDIA
Mopar Owner Connect or from the App Store
(iPhone) or Google Play Store (Android). Visit
UconnectPhone.com to determine if your device is compatible. For Uconnect Phone customer support and to determine if your device
is compatible.
g. Select and purchase the desired subscription option. The Wi-Fi Hotspot
will activate after a few minutes.
• This remote function requires your vehicle to be equipped with a factoryinstalled Remote Start system. To utilize this feature after the Uconnect App
is downloaded, login with your user
name and password.
U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or
call 1-877-855-8400.
For additional assistance, call AT&T Customer Care at: 866-595-1330.
Canadian residents - visit UconnectPhone.com
or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
call:1-800-387-9983 (French).
You will need your four digit SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to confirm the request.
Press the “remote start” icon on your
Uconnect App to remotely start the vehicle.
e. Open the web browser on your portable
device and enter the following web address: https://myvehicle.att.com/#/login.
f. Create a myVehicle account or log in to
your existing one.
NOTE:
Your vehicle must have a working electrical
system for any of the in vehicle SiriusXM
Guardian services to operate.
SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features
If you own a compatible iPhone or Android
powered device, the Uconnect App allows
you to remotely lock or unlock your doors,
start your engine or activate your horn and
lights from virtually anywhere. Your vehicle
must be equipped with remote start, must
have a SiriusXM Guardian subscription, and
must have an operable network connection.
Services can only be used where coverage is
available. You can download the App from
242
Remote Start (If Equipped) — This feature
provides the ability to start the engine on your
vehicle, without the keys and from virtually
any distance. You can send a request to your
vehicle in one of two ways:
1. Using the Uconnect App from a compatible device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
• After 15 minutes if you have not entered your vehicle with the key, the
engine will shut off automatically.
• You can also send a command to turn-off
an engine that has been remote started.
You can set-up notifications for your account
to receive an email or text (SMS) message
every time a command is sent. Login to
Mopar Owner Connect at mopar.com and
click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM
Guardian Notifications.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock — If Equipped —
This feature provides the ability to lock or unlock
the door on your vehicle, without the keys and
from virtually any distance. You can send a
request to your vehicle in one of three ways:
1. Using the Uconnect App from a compatible device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
3. By contacting SiriusXM Guardian Care on
the phone.
To use this feature after the Uconnect App is
downloaded, login using your user name and
password. You will need your four digit SiriusXM
Guardian Security PIN to confirm the request.
Press the “closed lock” icon on your Uconnect
App to lock the doors, and press the “open lock”
icon to unlock the driver’s door.
You can set-up notifications for your account to
receive an email or text (SMS) message every time
a command is sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect at mopar.com and click on Edit Profile to
manage SiriusXM Guardian Notifications.
Remote Horn And Lights — If Equipped — It’s
easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or
noisy parking area by activating the horn and
lights. It may also help if you need to draw
attention to your vehicle for any reason. You
can send a request to your vehicle in one of
three ways:
1. Using the Uconnect App from a compatible device.
To use this feature after the Uconnect App is
downloaded, login using your user name and
password. You will need your four digit
SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to confirm
the request. You can set-up notifications for
your account to receive an email or text
(SMS) message every time a command is
sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect at
mopar.com and click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM Guardian Notifications.
4. Select your preferred Navigation App to
route a path to your vehicle.
Vehicle Finder
1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect
Mobile App bottom bar.
The Vehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect
Mobile App allows you to find the location of
your vehicle when you can't remember where
it's parked. You can also sound the alarm and
flash the lights to make finding your vehicle
even easier.
To find your vehicle:
1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect
Mobile App bottom bar.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
2. Select the “Vehicle” icon to determine the
location of your vehicle.
3. By contacting the SiriusXM Guardian Care
on the phone.
3. Select the “Find Route” button that appears, once your vehicle is located.
Send & Go
The Send & Go feature of the Uconnect
Mobile App allows you to search for a destination on your mobile device and then send
the route to your vehicle’s Uconnect Navigation system.
To send a navigation route to your vehicle:
2. Either type in the destination you would
like to navigate to, or search through one
of the categories provided.
3. Select the destination you want to route to
from the list that appears.
4. Press the “Send To Vehicle” button, and
then confirm the destination by pressing
“Yes,” to send the navigation route to the
Uconnect Navigation in your vehicle.
5. Finally, confirm the route inside your vehicle by pressing the “Go Now” option on
the pop-up that appears on the touchscreen, when the vehicle is started.
243
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT 3 WITH 5–INCH DISPLAY — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display At A Glance
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display Radio Buttons
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
RADIO Button
COMPASS Button
SETTINGS Button
MORE Functions Button
BROWSE/ENTER Button — TUNE/SCROLL Knob
244
6 — SCREEN OFF Button
7 — MUTE Button
8 — System On/Off — Volume Control Knob
9 — Uconnect PHONE Button
10 — MEDIA Button
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen,
doing so can result in damage to the touchscreen.
Clock Setting
To start the clock setting procedure:
1. Press the Settings button on the faceplate, then press the “Clock and Date”
button.
2. Press the “Set Time” button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
In the Clock Setting Menu you can also select
Display Clock. Display Clock turns the clock
display in the status bar on or off.
the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the Center “C” button on the
touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to
the factory setting.
Audio Setting
Speed Adjusted Volume — If Equipped
1. Press the “Settings” button on the
faceplate.
Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button
on the touchscreen to select between OFF, 1,
2 or 3. This will decrease the radio volume
relative to a decrease in vehicle speed.
2. Scroll down and press the “Audio” button
on the touchscreen to open the Audio
menu.
3. The Audio Menu shows the following options for you to customize your audio
settings.
3. Press the “Up” or “Down” arrows to adjust
the hours or minutes, then select the
“AM” or “PM” button on the touchscreen.
You can also select 12hr or 24hr format by
pressing the desired button on the
touchscreen.
Equalizer
4. Once the time is set press the “Done”
button on the touchscreen to exit the time
screen.
Balance/Fade
Press the “Equalizer” button on the touchscreen to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble.
Use the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen
to adjust the equalizer to your desired settings.
Loudness — If Equipped
Press the “Loudness” button on the touchscreen to select the Loudness feature. When
this feature is activated it improves sound
quality at lower volumes.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
Press the “Surround Sound” button on the
touchscreen, select On or Off followed by
pressing the back arrow button on the touchscreen. When this feature is activated, it
provides simulated surround sound mode.
Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the
touchscreen to adjust the sound from the
speakers. Use the arrow buttons on the
touchscreen to adjust the sound level from
245
MULTIMEDIA
Radio Operation
the “All” button on the touchscreen on the
radio home screen displays all of the preset
stations for that mode.
USB/Audio Jack (AUX)/Bluetooth
Operation
To store a radio preset manually, follow the
steps below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press and hold the desired numbered button on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds, or until you hear a confirmation
beep.
Radio Operation
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
Radio Station Preset
All Presets
Seek Next
Audio Settings
Station Information
Direct Tune
Radio Band
Seek Previous
Seek Next/Previous Buttons
• Press the Seek up or Seek down button to
seek through radio stations in AM, FM or
SXM bands.
• Hold either button to bypass stations without stopping.
USB Port And Audio Jack (AUX)
1 — USB Port
2 — AUX/Audio Jack
Store Radio Presets Manually
USB/AUX
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of
the Radio modes. There are four visible presets at the top of the radio screen. Pressing
The USB/AUX Jack is located in the center of
the gear shift zone, below the HVAC controls.
246
• USB/iPod Mode is entered by either inserting a USB Jump Drive or an iPod cable into
the USB port or by pushing the MEDIA
button on the faceplate located below the
display. Once in Media Mode, press the
“Source” button on the touchscreen and
select USB/iPod.
NOTE:
The USB source will say "iPod" only when an
apple product is connected to the USB port.
• Push the MEDIA button on the faceplate,
press the “Source” button on the touchscreen then select USB/iPod to change the
mode to the USB device. If the device is
connected, music from your portable device will play through the vehicle's
speakers.
Audio Jack (AUX)
The AUX jack allows a portable device, such
as an MP3 player or an iPod, to be plugged
into the radio and utilize the vehicle’s audio
system, using a 3.5 mm audio cable, to
amplify the source and play through the vehicle speakers.
• Push the MEDIA button on the faceplate,
press the “Source” button on the touchscreen then select AUX to change the mode
to AUX.
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display Available Media Hubs
Uconnect 3
Media Hub
(USB, AUX
Ports)
S
Remote USB
Port (Fully
Functional)
O
• The functions of the portable device are
controlled using the device. However, the
volume may be controlled using the radio or
portable device.
S = Standard Equipment
Bluetooth
O = Optional Equipment
If using a Bluetooth - equipped device, you
may also be able to stream music to your
vehicle's sound system.
Voice Text Reply (Not Compatible With
iPhone)
Push the MEDIA button on the faceplate,
press the “Source” button on the touchscreen then select Bluetooth to change the
mode to Bluetooth. If the device is paired,
music from your portable device will play
through the vehicle's speakers.
NOTE:
If changing the name of the device within the
Bluetooth settings of your device (where applicable), and the device is connected to the
vehicle Bluetooth system, the system may
change the current playing track.
Once your Uconnect system is paired with a
compatible mobile device, the system can
announce a new incoming text message, and
read it to you over the vehicle audio system.
You can reply to the message using Voice
Recognition by selecting, or saying, one of
the 18 pre-defined messages.
Here’s How:
1. Push the Voice Recognition (VR)
and Phone button and wait for the beep,
then say “reply.” Uconnect gives the following prompt: “Please say the message
you would like to send.”
247
MULTIMEDIA
2. Wait for the beep and say one of the predefined messages. (If you are not sure, you
can say “help”). Uconnect will then read
the pre-defined messages allowed.
3. As soon as you hear the message you
would like to send, you can interrupt the
list of prompts by pushing the Uconnect
phone button and saying the phrase.
Uconnect will confirm the message by
reading it back to you.
4. Push the Phone button and say “Send.”
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Stuck in
Yes.
See you later.
traffic.
Start without
No.
I’ll be late.
me.
I will be <5,
Where are
Okay.
10, 15, 20,
you?
25, 30, 45,
Are you there
60>* minCall me.
yet?
utes late.
248
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
See you in
I’ll call you
I need
<5, 10, 15,
later.
directions.
20, 25, 30,
I’m on my
45, 60>*
Can’t
talk
way.
minutes.
right now.
I’m lost.
Thanks.
*Use only the numbering listed or the system
may not transcribe the message properly.
NOTE:
Voice Text Reply and Voice Texting features
require a compatible mobile device enabled
with Bluetooth Message Access Profile
(MAP). iPhone and some other smartphones
do not currently support Bluetooth MAP. Visit
UconnectPhone.com for system and device
compatibility.
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text
messages, select media, place phone calls
and much more. Siri uses your natural language to understand what you mean and
responds back to confirm your requests. The
system is designed to keep your eyes on the
road and your hands on the wheel by letting
Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on
the steering wheel. After you hear a double
beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and
music, get directions, read text messages
and many other useful requests.
UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH
DISPLAY
Uconnect 4 At A Glance
Setting The Time
Balance/Fade
• For Uconnect 4, turn the unit on, and then
press the time display at the top of the
screen. Press “Yes.”
• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the
touchscreen to Balance audio between the
front speakers or fade the audio between
the rear and front speakers.
• If the time is not displayed at the top of the
screen, press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press
the “Clock & Date” button on the touchscreen, then check or uncheck this option.
• Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and
Set Time Minutes to adjust the time.
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio
Screen
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen, doing so can result in damage to
the screen.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact software for your vehicle.
• If these features are not available, uncheck
the Sync Time box.
• Press “X” to save your settings and exit out
of the Clock Setting screen.
Audio Settings
• Press the “Audio” button on the touchscreen to activate the Audio settings screen
to adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, Speed
Adjusted Volume, Surround Sound, Loudness, AUX Volume Offset, Auto Play, and
Radio Off With Door.
• You can return to the Radio screen by
pressing the “X” located at the top right.
• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or
“Right” buttons on the touchscreen or
press and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust
the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touchscreen to activate the Equalizer screen.
• Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen, or press and drag over the level bar
for each of the equalizer bands. The level
value, which spans between plus or minus
nine, is displayed at the bottom of each of
the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button
on the touchscreen to activate the Speed
Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by pressing the
249
MULTIMEDIA
volume level indicator. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with
variation to vehicle speed.
and “Off.” With Auto Play on, music begins
playing from a connected device, immediately after it is connected to the radio.
Loudness — If Equipped
Auto On Radio — If Equipped
• Press the “On” button on the touchscreen
to activate Loudness. Press “Off” to deactivate this feature. When Loudness is On,
the sound quality at lower volumes
improves.
• The Radio automatically turns on when
vehicle is in run or will recall whether it was
on or off at last ignition off.
AUX Volume Offset
• Press the “Radio Off With Door” button on
the touchscreen to activate the Radio Off
With Door screen. The Radio Off With Door
feature, when activated, keeps the radio on
until the driver or passenger door is opened,
or when the Radio Off Delay selected time
has expired.
• Press the “AUX Volume Offset” button on
the touchscreen to activate the AUX Volume Offset screen. The AUX Volume Offset
is adjusted by pressing of the “+” and “–”
buttons. This alters the AUX input audio
volume. The level value, which spans between plus or minus three, is displayed
above the adjustment bar.
Auto Play — If Equipped
• Press the “Auto Play” button on the touchscreen to activate the Auto Play screen. The
Auto Play feature has two settings “On”
250
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
Drag & Drop Menu Bar
The Uconnect features and services in the
main menu bar are easily changed for your
convenience. Simply follow these steps:
Uconnect 4 Main Menu
1. Press the “Apps
App screen.
” button to open the
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected
App to replace an existing shortcut in the
main menu bar.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged
down onto the main menu bar, will now
be an active App/shortcut.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is
in PARK.
Radio
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Radio Station Presets
Toggle Between Presets
Status Bar
Main Category Bar
Audio Settings
6 — Seek Up
7 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station
8 — Seek Down
9 — Browse And Manage Presets
10 — Radio Bands
251
MULTIMEDIA
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian
services, and applications in this vehicle.
Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so.
Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
• To access the Radio mode, press the “Radio” button on the touchscreen.
Selecting Radio Stations
• Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or
SXM) button on the touchscreen.
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on
the touchscreen for less than two seconds
to seek through radio stations.
• Press and hold either arrow button on the
touchscreen for more than two seconds to
bypass stations without stopping. The radio
will stop at the next listenable station once
the arrow button on the touchscreen is
released.
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a radio station by pressing
the “Tune” button on the screen, and entering the desired station number.
Store Radio Presets Manually
Your radio can store 36 total preset stations,
12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They
are shown at the top of your radio screen. To
see the 12 preset stations per band, press the
arrow button on the touchscreen at the top
right of the screen to toggle between the two
sets of six presets.
To store a radio preset manually, follow the
steps below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press and hold the desired numbered button on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds or until you hear a confirmation
beep.
252
Media Hub — USB/Audio Jack (AUX) — If
Equipped
Uconnect Media Hub
1 — USB Port
2 — AUX Port
• Pressing the “AUX” button on the touchscreen will change the mode to auxiliary
device if the audio jack is connected, allowing the music from your device to be heard
through the vehicle's speakers. To activate
the AUX, plug in the audio jack.
• The functions of the device are controlled
using the device buttons. The volume may
be controlled using the radio or device.
• To route the audio cable out of the center
console, use the access cut out in the front
of the console.
USB Port
Rear Seat USB (Charge Only)
There are many ways to play music from
MP3 players or USB devices through your
vehicle's sound system. Press your Media
button on the touchscreen to begin.
Audio Jack (AUX)
• The AUX allows a device to be plugged into
the radio and utilize the vehicle’s sound
system, using a 3.5 mm audio cable, to
amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
• Connect your compatible device using a
USB cable into the USB Port. USB Memory
sticks with audio files can also be used.
Audio from the device can be played on the
vehicles sound system while providing
metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
information on the radio display.
• When connected, the compatible USB device can be controlled using the radio or
Steering Wheel Audio Controls to play, skip
to the next or previous track, browse, and
list the contents.
• The battery charges when plugged into the
USB port (if supported by the specific device).
NOTE:
When connecting your device for the first
time, the system may take several minutes to
read your music, depending on the number of
files. For example, the system will take approximately five minutes for every
1,000 songs loaded on the device. Also during the reading process, the Shuffle and
Browse functions will be disabled. This process is needed to ensure the full use of your
features and only happens the first time it is
connected. After the first time, the reading
process of your device will take considerably
less time unless changes are made or new
songs are added to the playlist.
Bluetooth Streaming Audio
• If equipped with Uconnect Voice Command, your Bluetooth-equipped device
may also be able to stream music to your
vehicle's sound system. Your connected device must be Bluetooth-compatible and
paired with your system (see Uconnect
Phone for pairing instructions). You can
253
MULTIMEDIA
access the music from your connected
Bluetooth device by pressing the Bluetooth
button on the touchscreen while in Media mode.
Media Controls
The controls are accessed by pressing the
desired button on the touchscreen and
choosing between AUX, USB, or Bluetooth.
1. Download the Android Auto app from the
Google Play store on your Androidpowered smartphone.
NOTE:
Uconnect will automatically switch to the
appropriate mode when something is first
connected or inserted into the system.
2. Connect your Android powered smartphone to one of the media USB ports in
your vehicle. If you have not downloaded
the Android Auto app to your smartphone
before plugging in the device for the first
time, the app begins to download.
Android Auto — If Equipped
Media Controls
1 — Repeat Music Track
2 — Music Track And Time
3 — Shuffle Music Tracks
4 — Music Track Information
5 — Show Songs Currently In Queue To
Be Played
6 — Browse Music By
7 — Music Source
254
Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect
system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, or
higher, powered smartphone with a data
plan, that allows you to project your smartphone and a number of its apps onto the
touchscreen radio display. Android Auto automatically brings you useful information,
and organizes it into simple cards that appear
just when they are needed. Android Auto can
be used with Google's best-in-class speech
technology, the steering wheel controls, the
knobs and buttons on your radio faceplate,
and the radio display’s touchscreen to control
many of your apps. To use Android Auto
follow the following steps:
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB
cable that came with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not work.Your
phone may ask you to approve the use of
the Android Auto app before use.
NOTE:
To use Android Auto, make sure you are in an
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto
may use cellular data and your cellular coverage is shown in the upper right corner of the
radio screen. Once Android Auto has made a
connection through USB, Android Auto will
also connect via Bluetooth.
Android Auto
• Google Maps for navigation
• Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio,
etc. for music
• Handsfree Calling, and Texting for communication
• Hundred of compatible apps, and many
more!
1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning cable that came with your phone, as
aftermarket cables may not work.
3. Once the device is connected and recognized, Android Auto should automatically
launch, but you can also launch it by
touching the Android Auto icon on the
touchscreen, located under Apps.
Once Android Auto is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can
be utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:
To use CarPlay, make sure you are using
iPhone 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Settings, that your iPhone is unlocked for the
very first connection only, and then use the
following procedure:
2. Once the device is connected and recognized, CarPlay should automatically
launch, but you can also launch it by
touching the CarPlay icon on the touchscreen, located under Apps.
Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage
Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple CarPlay, the smarter, more secure way to use
your iPhone in the car, and stay focused on
the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen
display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and
your voice with Siri to get access to Apple
Music, Maps, Messages, and more.
CarPlay
255
MULTIMEDIA
Once CarPlay is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can
be utilized using your iPhone’s data plan:
UCONNECT 4C/4C NAV
WITH 8.4–INCH DISPLAY
• Phone
Uconnect 4/4C NAV At A Glance
WARNING!
Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
• Music
CAUTION!
• Messages
Do not attach any object to touchscreen,
doing so can result in damage to the
touchscreen.
• Maps
NOTE:
To use CarPlay make sure that cellular data is
turned on, and that you are in an area with
cellular coverage. Your data and cellular coverage is shown on the left side of the radio
screen.
Setting The Time
Uconnect 4/4C NAV Radio
WARNING!
CarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage
256
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian
services, and applications in this vehicle.
Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so.
• Model Uconnect 4/4C NAV synchronizes
time automatically via GPS, so it should not
require any time adjustment. If you do need
to set the time manually, follow the instructions below for Model Uconnect 4/4C NAV.
• For Uconnect 4/4C NAV, turn the unit on,
and then press the time display at the top of
the screen. Press “Yes.”
• If the time is not displayed at the top of the
screen, press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press
the “Clock” button on the touchscreen,
then check or uncheck this option.
• Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and
Set Time Minutes to adjust the time.
Balance/Fade
Drag & Drop Menu Bar
The Uconnect features and services in the
main menu bar are easily changed for your
convenience. Simply follow these steps:
Background Themes — If Equipped
• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the
touchscreen to Balance audio between the
front speakers or fade the audio between
the rear and front speakers.
• Screen background themes are selectable
from a pre-loaded list of themes. If you’d
like to set a theme, follow the instructions
below.
• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or
“Right” buttons on the touchscreen or
press and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust
the Balance/Fade.
• Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen.
Equalizer
• If these features are not available, uncheck
the Sync Time box.
• Press “X” to save your settings and exit out
of the Clock Setting screen.
• Press the “Display” button on the touchscreen.
• Then press “Theme” button on the touchscreen and select a theme.
Audio Settings
• Press of the “Audio” button on the touchscreen in radio or media mode to activate
the Audio settings screen to adjust
Balance\Fade, Equalizer, and Speed Adjusted Volume.
• You can return to the Radio screen by
pressing the “X” located at the top right.
• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touchscreen to activate the Equalizer screen.
• Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen, or press and drag over the level bar for
each of the equalizer bands. The level value,
which spans between plus or minus nine, is
displayed at the bottom of each of the Bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button
on the touchscreen to activate the Speed
Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by pressing the
volume level indicator. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with
variation to vehicle speed.
Uconnect 4/4C NAV With 8.4–inch
Display Main Menu
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the
App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected
App to replace an existing shortcut in the
main menu bar.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged
down onto the main menu bar, will now
be an active App/shortcut.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is
in PARK.
257
MULTIMEDIA
Radio
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Radio
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
258
Radio Station Presets
Toggle Between Presets
Status Bar
View Small Navigation Map
HD Radio
Main Category Bar
7 — Audio Settings
8 — Seek Up
9 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station
10 — Seek Down
11 — Browse And Manage Presets
12 — Radio Bands
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian
services, and applications in this vehicle.
Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so.
Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
• To access the Radio mode, press the “Radio” button on the touchscreen.
Selecting Radio Stations
• Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or
SXM) button on the touchscreen.
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on
the touchscreen for less than two seconds
to seek through radio stations.
• Press and hold either arrow button on the
touchscreen for more than two seconds to
bypass stations without stopping. The radio
stops at the next listenable station once the
arrow button on the touchscreen is released.
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a radio station by pressing
the “Tune” button on the screen, and entering the desired station number.
Store Radio Presets Manually
Your radio can store 36 total preset stations,
12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They
are shown at the top of your radio screen. To
see the 12 preset stations per band, press the
arrow button on the touchscreen at the top
right of the screen to toggle between the two
sets of six presets.
• With an HD radio receiver, the listener is
provided with a clear sound that enhances
the listening experience. HD radio can also
transmit data such as song title or artist.
Media Hub — USB/Audio Jack (AUX) — If
Equipped
To store a radio preset manually, follow the
steps below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press and hold the desired numbered button on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds or until you hear a confirmation
beep.
HD Radio — If Equipped
• HD Radio (available on Uconnect 4C/4C
NAV) operates similar to conventional radio
except it allows broadcasters to transmit a
high-quality digital signal.
Uconnect Media Hub
1 — USB Port
2 — AUX Port
259
MULTIMEDIA
• Pressing the “AUX” button on the touchscreen will change the mode to auxiliary
device if the audio jack is connected, allowing the music from your device to be heard
through the vehicle's speakers. To activate
the AUX, plug in the audio jack.
• The functions of the device are controlled
using the device buttons. The volume may
be controlled using the radio or device.
• To route the audio cable out of the center
console, use the access cut out in the front
of the console.
USB Port
Rear Seat USB (Charge Only)
There are many ways to play music from
MP3 players or USB devices through your
vehicle's sound system. Press your Media
button on the touchscreen to begin.
Audio Jack (AUX)
• The AUX allows a device to be plugged into
the radio and utilize the vehicle’s sound
system, using a 3.5 mm audio cable, to
amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
260
• Connect your compatible device using a
USB cable into the USB Port. USB Memory
sticks with audio files can also be used.
Audio from the device can be played on the
vehicles sound system while providing
metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
information on the radio display.
• When connected, the compatible USB device can be controlled using the radio or
Steering Wheel Audio Controls to play, skip
to the next or previous track, browse, and
list the contents.
• The battery charges when plugged into the
USB port (if supported by the specific device).
NOTE:
When connecting your device for the first
time, the system may take several minutes to
read your music, depending on the number of
files. For example, the system will take approximately five minutes for every
1,000 songs loaded on the device. Also during the reading process, the Shuffle and
Browse functions will be disabled. This process is needed to ensure the full use of your
features and only happens the first time it is
connected. After the first time, the reading
process of your device will take considerably
less time unless changes are made or new
songs are added to the playlist.
Bluetooth Streaming Audio
• If equipped with Uconnect Voice Command, your Bluetooth-equipped device
may also be able to stream music to your
vehicle's sound system. Your connected device must be Bluetooth-compatible and
paired with your system (see Uconnect
Phone for pairing instructions). You can
access the music from your connected
Bluetooth device by pressing the Bluetooth
button on the touchscreen while in Media mode.
Media Controls
The controls are accessed by pressing the
desired button on the touchscreen and
choosing between AUX, USB, or Bluetooth.
1. Download the Android Auto app from the
Google Play store on your Androidpowered smartphone.
NOTE:
Uconnect switches to the appropriate mode
when something is first connected or inserted
into the system.
2. Connect your Android powered smartphone to one of the media USB ports in
your vehicle. If the Android Auto app was
not downloaded, the first time you plug
your device in, the app will begin to
download.
Android Auto — If Equipped
Media Controls
1 — Repeat Music Track
2 — Music Track And Time
3 — Shuffle Music Tracks
4 — Music Track Information
5 — Show Songs Currently In Queue To
Be Played
6 — Browse Music By
7 — Music Source
Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect
system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, or
higher, powered smartphone with a data plan,
that allows you to project your smartphone
and a number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio display. Android Auto automatically brings you useful information, and organizes it into simple cards that appear just
when they are needed. Android Auto can be
used with Google's best-in-class speech technology, the steering wheel controls, the knobs
and buttons on your radio faceplate, and the
radio display’s touchscreen to control many
of your apps. To use Android Auto follow the
following procedure:
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB
cable that came with your phone, as aftermarket cables may not work.
Android Auto
261
MULTIMEDIA
3. Once the device is connected and recognized, the “Phone” icon on the drag &
drop menu bar will change to the Android
Auto Icon. Android Auto should launch,
but if it does not, refer to the Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement for the procedure to enable the feature “AutoShow”.
You can also launch it by touching the
Android Auto icon on the touchscreen.
Once Android Auto is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can
be utilized using your smartphone’s data
plan:
• Google Maps for navigation
• Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio,
etc. for music
• Handsfree Calling, and Texting for communication
• Hundred of compatible apps
NOTE:
To use Android Auto, make sure you are in an
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto
may use cellular data and your cellular coverage is shown in the upper right corner of the
radio screen.
262
• Live traffic information
• Lane guidance
Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage
Maps
Google Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel or tap the microphone icon to ask
Google to take you to a desired destination by
voice. You can also touch the Navigation icon
in Android Auto to access Google Maps.
NOTE:
If the VR button is not held, and is only
pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR prompts you
and any navigation command said launches
the built-in Uconnect navigation system.
While using Android Auto, Google Maps provides voice-guided:
• Navigation
NOTE:
If you are using the built-in Uconnect navigation system, and you try and start a new
route using the Android Auto, via voice or any
other method, a pop-up appears asking if you
would like to switch from Uconnect navigation to smartphone navigation. A pop-up also
appears, asking if you’d like to switch, if
Android Auto is currently in use and you
attempt to launch a built-in Uconnect route.
Selecting “Yes” switches the navigation type
to the newly used method of navigation and a
route will be planned for the new destination.
If “No” is selected the navigation type remains unchanged.
For
further
information,
refer
to
www.android.com/auto/ (U.S. residents) or
https://www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/
(Canadian residents).
For further information on the navigation function, please refer to https://support.google.com/
android
or
https://support.google.com/
androidauto/.
Music
Android Auto allows you to access and stream
your favorite music with apps like Google Play
Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your
smartphone’s data plan, you can stream endless music on the road.
NOTE:
Music apps, playlists, and stations must be
set up on your smartphone prior to using
Android Auto, for them to work with Android
Auto.
Android Auto Music
Android Auto Contact
NOTE:
To see the metadata for the music playing
through Android Auto, select the Uconnect
System’s media screen.
For
further
information
refer
https://support.google.com/androidauto.
to
Communication
With Android Auto connected, press and hold
the VR button on the steering wheel to activate voice recognition specific to the Android
Auto. This will allow you to send and reply to
text messages, have incoming text messages
read out loud, and place and receive handsfree calls.
Android Auto Phone
Apps
The Android Auto App displays all the compatible apps that are available to use with
Android Auto, every time it is launched. You
263
MULTIMEDIA
must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed in to the app for it to
work with Android Auto. Refer to g.co/
androidauto to see the latest list of available
apps for Android Auto.
Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple CarPlay, the smarter, more secure way to use
your iPhone in the car, and stay focused on
the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen
display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and
your voice with Siri to get access to Apple
Music, Maps, Messages, and more.
2. Once the device is connected and recognized, the “Phone” icon on the drag &
drop menu bar changes to the Apple CarPlay icon. Apple CarPlay should launch,
but if not, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement for the procedure to
enable the feature “AutoShow”. You can
also touch the Apple CarPlay icon on the
touchscreen to launch it.
To use CarPlay, make sure you are using
iPhone 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Settings, ensure your iPhone is unlocked for the
very first connection only, and then use the
following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning cable that came with your phone, as
aftermarket cables may not work.
264
• Messages
• Maps
NOTE:
To use CarPlay make sure that cellular data is
turned on, and that you are in an area with
cellular coverage. Your data and cellular coverage is shown on the left side of the radio screen.
CarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage
CarPlay
Once CarPlay is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can
be utilized using your iPhone’s data plan:
• Phone
• Music
Phone
With CarPlay, press and hold the VR button
on the steering wheel to activate a Siri voice
recognition session. You can also press and
hold the Home button within CarPlay to start
talking to Siri. This allows you to make calls
or listen to voice mail as you normally would
using Siri on your iPhone.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on
the steering wheel launches a built-in VR
session, not a Siri session, and it will not
function with CarPlay.
Music
CarPlay allows you to access all your artists,
playlists, and music from iTunes. Using your
iPhone’s data plan, you can also use select
third party audio apps including music, news,
sports, podcasts and more.
Messages
NOTE:
Just like Phone, CarPlay allows you to use Siri
to send or reply to text messages. Siri can also
read incoming text messages, but driver’s will
not be able to read messages, as everything is
done via voice.
• If the VR button is not held, and is only
pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR prompts
you and any navigation command said
launches the built-in Uconnect navigation
system.
Maps
To use your Apple Maps for navigation on your
Uconnect system, launch CarPlay, and push
and hold the VR button on the steering wheel
to use Siri to set your desired destination.
Alternatively, choose a Nearby destination by
pressing Destinations and selecting a category, by launching Siri from the destinations
page, or even by typing in a destination.
• If you are using the built-in Uconnect navigation system, and you try and start a new
route using CarPlay, via voice or any other
method, a pop-up appears asking if you
would like to switch from Uconnect navigation to iPhone navigation. A pop-up also
appears, asking if you’d like to switch, if an
CarPlay navigation is currently in use and
you attempt to launch a built-in Uconnect
route. Selecting “Yes” switches the navigation type to the newly used method of
navigation and a route will be planned for
the new destination. If “No” is selected the
navigation type remains unchanged.
Apple Music
Maps
265
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SETTINGS
Navigation Pop-Up
Apps
To use a compatible app with CarPlay, you
must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed in to the app.
Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/
(U.S. Residents) or https://www.apple.com/
ca/ios/carplay/ (Canadian Residents) to see
the latest list of available apps for CarPlay to
see the latest list of available apps for CarPlay.
266
The Uconnect system allows you to access
Customer Programmable feature settings
such as Display, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety &
Driving Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,
Auto-On Comfort, Engine Off Options, Audio,
Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup, Restore
Settings, Clear Personal Data, and System
Information through buttons on the touchscreen.
Push the SETTINGS button (Uconnect
3 With 5–inch Display and Uconnect 4 With
7–inch Display), or press the “Apps” button
(Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display) located near the bottom of the touchscreen, then press the “Settings” button on
the touchscreen to access the Settings
screen. When making a selection, scroll up or
down until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press the preferred setting until
a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. The
following feature settings are available:
•
•
•
•
Display
Voice
Clock
Safety & Driving
Assistance
• Lights
• Doors & Locks
• Auto-On Comfort &
Remote Start — If
Equipped
• Engine Off Options
•
•
•
•
Audio
Phone/Bluetooth
SiriusXM Setup
Restore Settings
• Clear Personal Data
• System Information
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature
settings may vary.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for further information.
NAVIGATION — IF
EQUIPPED
• The information in the section below is only
applicable if you have the 4C NAV system.
Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in
the menu bar to access the Navigation system.
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt
Volume
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen in the lower right area of the
screen.
2. In the Settings menu, press the “Guidance” button on the touchscreen.
3. In the Guidance menu, adjust the Nav
Volume by pressing the “+” or “–” buttons
on the touchscreen.
267
MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Navigation
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
268
Search For A Destination In All Categories
Find A Destination
View Map
Navigate To Saved Home Destination
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Navigate To Saved Work Destination
Navigation Settings
Emergency
Information
Finding Points Of Interest
One-Step Voice Destination Entry
1. From the main Navigation menu, press
the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then press the “Points of Interest”
button on the touchscreen.
• Enter a navigation destination without taking your hands off the wheel.
2. Select a category and then a subcategory,
if necessary.
3. Select your destination and then select
“Route To” and then press the “GO!”
button on the touchscreen.
Finding A Place By Spelling The Name
• From the Main Navigation Menu press the
“Where to?” button on the touchscreen,
press the “POI” button on the touchscreen,
then press the “Spell Name” button on the
touchscreen.
• Enter the name of your destination.
• Press the “List” button on the touchscreen.
• Select your destination and then select
“Route To” and then press the “GO!” button on the touchscreen.
• Just push the Uconnect Voice Command
button on the steering wheel, wait for
the beep and say something like, "Find Address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills MI."
NOTE:
Destination entry is not available while your
vehicle is in motion. However, you can also
use Voice Commands to enter an address
while moving. Refer to “Uconnect Voice Recognition Quick Tips” in this section for further
information.
Setting Your Home Location
• To add a Home location, press the “Nav”
button on the touchscreen in the menu bar
to access the Navigation system and the
Main Navigation menu.
• Once you have entered your Home location,
select the “Save Home” button located on
the lower left-hand side of your touchscreen.
• To delete a saved Home location (or other
saved locations), so you can save a new
Home location, press the “Nav” button on
the touchscreen, and in the “Where To”
screen, press “Edit Where To” and then
press the “Home” button on the touchscreen. Under the Manage screen press the
“Reset Location” button. A confirmation
screen will appear asking if you “Are you
sure you want to reset this location?” Press
“Reset” to confirm the deletion. Set a new
Home location by following the previous
instructions.
Home
• A Home location must be saved in the
system. From the Main Navigation menu,
press the “Home” button on the
touchscreen.
• Press the “Home” button on the touchscreen. You can add a Home location by
either selecting “Spell City,” “Spell Street,”
or “Select Country.” Select County is automatically filled out based on your state.
269
MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Map
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Distance To Next Turn
Next Turn Street
Estimated Time Of Arrival
Zoom In And Out
270
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Your Location On The Map
Navigation Main Menu
Current Street Location
Navigation Routing Options
Your route is marked with a blue line on the
map. If you depart from the original route,
your route is recalculated. A speed limit icon
could appear as you travel on major roadways.
Adding A Stop
• To add a stop you must be navigating a
route.
• Press the “Menu” button on the touchscreen to return to the Main Navigation
menu.
NOTE:
If the route you are currently taking is the only
reasonable option, the device may not calculate a detour. For more information, see your
Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Traffic Plus (4C NAV)
Don't Drive Through Traffic. Drive Around It.
• Press the “Where To?” button on the touchscreen, then search for the extra stop.
When another location has been selected,
you can choose to cancel your previous
route, add as the first destination or add as
the last destination.
Avoid congestion before you reach it. By enhancing your vehicle's navigation system with
the ability to see detailed traffic information,
you can pinpoint traffic incidents, determine
average traffic speed and estimate travel time
along your route. Since the service is integrated with a vehicle's navigation system,
SiriusXM Traffic Plus can help drivers pick the
fastest route based on traffic conditions.
• Press the desired selection and press the
“GO!” button on the touchscreen.
• Detailed information on traffic speed, accidents, construction, and road closings.
Taking A Detour
• Traffic information from multiple sources,
including police and emergency services,
cameras and road sensors.
• To take a detour you must be navigating a
route.
• Press the “Detour” button on the touchscreen.
• Coast-to-coast delivery of traffic information.
• View conditions for points along your route
and beyond. Available in over 130 markets.
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV)
In addition to delivering over 130 channels of
the best sports, entertainment, talk, and
commercial-free music, SiriusXM offers premium data services that work in conjunction
with compatible navigation systems.
SiriusXM Travel Link brings a wealth of useful
information into your vehicle and right to your
fingertips.
• Fuel Prices — Check local gas and diesel
prices in your area and route to the station
of your choice.
• Movie Listings — Check local movie theatres and listings in your area and route to
the theater of your choice.
• Sports Scores — In-game and final scores
as well as weekly schedules.
• Weather — Check variety of local and national weather information from radar maps
to current and 5-day forecast.
271
MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM Travel Link feature is completely
integrated into your vehicle. A few minutes
after you start your vehicle, Travel Link information arrives and updates in the background. You can access the information
whenever you like, with no waiting.
To access SiriusXM Travel Link, press “Apps”
button on the touchscreen, then press the
“SiriusXM Travel Link” button on the touchscreen.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Travel Link requires a subscription,
sold separately after the trial subscription
included with your vehicle purchase.
272
UCONNECT PHONE
Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free Calling)
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display Radio Phone Menu
1
2
3
4
5
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
Call/Redial/Hold
Mobile Phone Signal Strength
Currently Paired Mobile Phone
Mobile Phone Battery Life
Mute Microphone
Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Uconnect Phone Settings Menu
8 — Text Messaging
9 — Direct Dial Pad
10 — Recent Call Log
11 — Browse Phone Book
12 — End Call
273
MULTIMEDIA
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio Phone Menu
1 — Favorite Contacts
2 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
4 — Siri
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Conference Call*
8 — Phone Settings
9 — Text Messaging**
10 — Direct Dial Pad
274
11 — Recent Call Log
12 — Browse Phone Book Entries
13 — End Call
14 — Call/Redial/Hold
15 — Do Not Disturb
16 — Reply with Text Message
* — Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile devices
** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones (requires Bluetooth MAP profile)
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Radio Phone Menu
1 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
2 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength
3 — Do Not Disturb
4 — Reply with Text Message**
5 — Current Phone Contact’s Name
6 — Conference Call*
7 — Phone Pairing
8 — Text Messaging Menu**
9 — Direct Dial Pad
10 — Contact Menu
11 — Recent Call Log
12 — Favorite Contacts
13 — Mute Microphone
14 — Decline Incoming Call
15 — Answer/Redial/Hold
16 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
17 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
* — Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile devices
** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones (requires Bluetooth MAP profile)
275
MULTIMEDIA
The Uconnect Phone feature enables you to
place and receive hands-free mobile phone
calls. Drivers can also place mobile phone
calls using their voice or by using the buttons
on the touchscreen (see Voice Command section).
The hands-free calling feature is made possible through Bluetooth technology — the
global standard that enables different electronic devices to connect to each other wirelessly.
If the Uconnect Phone Button
exists on
your steering wheel, you then have the
Uconnect Phone features.
• For Uconnect Customer Care:
2. Press the “Phone” button.
• U.S. residents visit UconnectPhone.com or
call 1-877-855-8400.
3. Select “Settings.”
Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your
Mobile Phone To The Uconnect System
5. Select “Add device.”
Mobile phone pairing is the process of establishing a wireless connection between a cellular phone and the Uconnect system.
4. Select “Paired Phones.”
• Uconnect Phone will display an “In
progress” screen while the system is
connecting.
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display:
Start Pairing Procedure On The Radio
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display:
NOTE:
• The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile
phone equipped with the Bluetooth HandsFree Profile, Version 1.0 or higher.
• Most mobile phones/devices are compatible with the Uconnect system, however
some mobile phones/devices may not be
equipped with all of the required features
to utilize all of the Uconnect system features.
276
Uconnect 4
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON
position.
Uconnect 3
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON
position.
2. Press the “Phone” button in the Menu Bar
on the touchscreen. A message will display asking “No phone connected. Do you
want to pair a phone?” Select Yes.
3. After selecting “Yes,” go through the
steps to pair your phone using your
Bluetooth connectivity.
4. Once pairing is successful, a message will
display asking, “Make this your Favorite?”
Then select Yes or No.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display:
2. Press the “Phone” button in the Menu Bar
on the touchscreen.
Pair Your iPhone:
• A message will display asking, “No
Phone Connected. Would you like to
pair a phone?” Select Yes. After pressing Yes, the radio prompts will take you
through the steps to connect your
phone via Bluetooth.
• Uconnect Phone will display an “In
progress” screen while the system is
connecting. Once the pairing has been
successful, a message will display
“Bluetooth pairing successful: The device supports Phone and Audio.” Click
“OK.”
3. Select “Settings.”
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
4. Select “Phone/Bluetooth,” and then select “Paired Phones and Audio Devices.”
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON
position.
5. The “Add Device” option will be listed
under the “Paired Phones” section.
Bluetooth On/Uconnect Device
To search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled iPhone:
1. Press the Settings button.
2. Select Bluetooth.
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled. Once enabled, the mobile phone
will begin to search for Bluetooth
connections.
277
MULTIMEDIA
3. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”.
Complete The iPhone Pairing Procedure:
Pairing Request
1. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect Phone.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones will require you to
enter the PIN number.
278
Select The iPhone's Priority Level
When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this
mobile phone the highest priority. This mobile phone will take precedence over other
paired mobile phones within range and will
connect to the Uconnect system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one
mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio
device can be connected to the Uconnect
system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply
select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/
audio device Bluetooth screen, and the
Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth device.
Pair Your Android Device:
Uconnect Device
To search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled Android Device:
1. Push the Menu button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Turn Bluetooth setting to “On.”
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for
Bluetooth connections.
5. Once your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”.
• You may be prompted by your mobile
phone to download the phonebook,
check “Do Not Ask Again” to automatically download the phonebook. This is
so you can make calls by saying the
name of your contact.
Complete The Android Pairing Procedure:
Pairing Request
1. Confirm the passkey shown on the mobile
phone matches the passkey shown on the
Uconnect system then accept the
Bluetooth pairing request.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones require the PIN to be
entered manually, enter the PIN number
shown on the Uconnect screen.
Select The Android Mobile Phone's Priority
Level
When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this
mobile phone the highest priority. This mobile phone will take precedence over other
paired mobile phones within range and will
connect to the Uconnect system automatically when entering the vehicle. Only one
mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio
device can be connected to the Uconnect
system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply
select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/
audio device Bluetooth screen, and the
Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth device.
NOTE:
Keep in mind that software updates – either
on your phone or Uconnect system – may
interfere with the Bluetooth connection. If
this happens, simply repeat the pairing process. However, first, make sure to delete the
device from the list of phones on your
Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove
Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth settings.
You are now ready to make hands-free calls.
Press the Uconnect “Phone” button
on
your steering wheel to begin.
NOTE:
Refer
to
UconnectPhone.com
or
www.DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or
www.DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents) or an authorized dealer for additional
information on mobile phone pairing and for
a list of compatible phones.
279
MULTIMEDIA
Common Phone Commands (Examples)
• “Call John Smith”
• “Call John Smith mobile”
• “Dial 1 248 555 1212”
• “Redial”
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During
Call
• During a call, press the “Mute” button on
the Phone main screen, that appears only
when a call is in progress, to mute and
unmute the call.
Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset
And Vehicle
• During an on-going call, press the “Transfer” button on the Phone main screen to
transfer an on-going call between handset
and vehicle.
that the phone is connected. Phonebook entries are displayed in the Contacts menu. If
your phone book entries do not appear, check
the settings on your phone. Some phones
require you to enable this feature manually.
Changing The Volume
• Your phonebook can be browsed on the
Uconnect system touchscreen, but editing
can only be done on your phone. To browse,
press the “Phone” button on the touchscreen, then the “Phonebook” button on
the touchscreen.
• Start a dialogue by pushing the VR button
, then say a command. For example,
"Help".
Favorite phonebook entries can be saved as
Favorites for quicker access. Favorites are
shown in the Favorites menu.
NOTE:
The volume setting for Uconnect is different
than the audio system.
Voice Command Tips
NOTE:
on the
To access help, push the VR button
steering wheel and say "help." Push the VR
button
and say "cancel" to cancel the
help session.
• Speaking complete names (i.e; Call John
Doe vs. Call John) will result in greater
system accuracy.
Phonebook
• You can “link” commands together for
faster results. Say “Call John Doe, mobile,”
for example.
The Uconnect system will automatically sync
your phonebook from your paired phone, if
this feature is supported by your phone.
Phonebook contacts are updated each time
• If you are listening to available voice command options, you do not have to listen to
the entire list. When you hear the command
280
button on the
that you need, push the
steering wheel, wait for the beep and say
your command.
• Use the radio VOLUME/MUTE rotary knob
to adjust the volume to a comfortable level
while the Uconnect system is speaking.
Using Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while you
were using Do Not Disturb.
To activate Do Not Disturb, select “Pairing”
on the phone menu bar, and select “Do Not
Disturb” from the Settings menu. You can
also activate it using the “Do Not Disturb”
button at the top of every Phone screen.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call or both, when declining
an incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to
you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
• Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on phones that supporting Bluetooth
MAP.
Incoming Text Messages
After pairing your Uconnect system with a
Bluetooth enabled mobile device with the
Message Access Profile (MAP), the Uconnect
system can announce a new incoming text
message and read it to you over the vehicle’s
audio system.
2. Select Bluetooth.
• Ensure Bluetooth is enabled, and the
mobile phone is paired to the Uconnect
system.
3. Select
located under DEVICES next to
Uconnect.
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on.
To listen to incoming text messages, or any
messages currently on the mobile phone,
select the “Messages” menu and press the
“Listen” button next to the message you want
to listen to.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can
be selected so you can still place a second
call without being interrupted by incoming
calls.
NOTE:
Only incoming text messages received during
the current ignition cycle can be viewed/read.
NOTE:
iPhone
Android Devices
• Only the beginning of your custom message
will be seen on the touchscreen.
1. Press the settings button on the mobile
phone.
1. Push the Menu button on the mobile
phone.
To enable incoming text messaging:
Enable iPhone Incoming Text Messages
281
MULTIMEDIA
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on.
• A pop up will appear asking you to
accept a request for permission to connect to your messages. Select “Don’t
ask again” and press OK.
NOTE:
All incoming text messages received during
the current ignition cycle will be deleted from
the Uconnect system when the ignition is
turned to the OFF position.
Helpful Tips And Common Questions To
Improve Bluetooth Performance With
Your Uconnect System
Mobile Phone won’t reconnect to system after
pairing:
• Set mobile phone to auto-connect or
trusted device in mobile phone Bluetooth
settings (Blackberry devices).
Enable Android Device Incoming Text
Messages
282
• Many mobile phones do not automatically
reconnect after being restarted (hard reboot).
Your mobile phone can still be connected
manually. Close all applications that may be
operating (refer to mobile phone manufacturer’s instructions), and follow “Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mobile Phone To The
Uconnect System”.
• Perform a factory reset on your mobile
phone. Refer to your mobile phone manufacturer or cellular provider for instructions.
This should only be done as a last resort.
Mobile Phone won’t pair to system:
• Delete pairing history in mobile phone and
Uconnect system; usually found in phone’s
Bluetooth connection settings.
• Verify you are selecting “Uconnect” in the
discovered Bluetooth devices on your mobile phone.
• If your vehicle system generates a pin code
the default is 0000.
• Perform a hard reset in the mobile phone by
removing the battery (if removable — see
your mobile phone’s owner manual). This
should only be done as a last resort.
Mobile Phonebook didn’t download:
• Check “Do not ask again,” then accept the
“phonebook download” request on your
mobile phone.
• Up to 5,000 contact names with four numbers per contact will transfer to the
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV system phonebook.
• Up to 2,000 contact names with six numbers per contact will transfer to the
Uconnect 4 system phonebook.
Can’t make a conference call:
• CDMA (Code-Division Multiple Access) carriers do not support conference calling.
Refer to your mobile phone user’s manual
for further information.
Making calls while connected to AUX:
• Plugging in your mobile phone to AUX while
connected to Bluetooth will disable HandsFree Calling. Do not make calls while your
mobile phone is plugged into the AUX jack.
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display Radio
Visual Cues
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar, or
in the Apps menus, of your 8.4-inch touchscreen, you have the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not, you have a Uconnect 4 with
8.4-inch display system.
UCONNECT VOICE
RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know
to control your Uconnect 3, Uconnect 4, or
Uconnect 4/4C NAV system.
Uconnect 4C NAV
Uconnect 4
283
MULTIMEDIA
Get Started
Basic Voice Commands
All you need to control your Uconnect system
with your voice are the buttons on your steering wheel.
The basic Voice Commands below can be
given at any point while using your Uconnect
system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Push the VR button
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and feature compatibility and
to find phone pairing instructions.
• “Cancel” to stop a current voice session
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
• “Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned on the rearview
mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you
must first push either the Voice Recognition (VR) or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR or
Phone button and saying a Voice Command from current category.
284
. After the beep, say:
• “Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A
Phone Call, Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio, Media, or Climate Functions. For
8.4–inch System Only: Push To Begin
Navigation Function
3 — Push To End Call
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the touchscreen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or
SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included
SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
• “Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
• “Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to
say or want to learn a Voice Command, push
the VR button
and say “Help.” The
system provides you with a list of commands.
• “Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Greatest Hits”; “Play song Moonlight Sonata”;
“Play genre Classical”
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB
device. Your Voice Command must match
exactly how the artist, album, song and genre
information is displayed.
Uconnect 4/4C NAV Radio
Media
Uconnect 3 Radio
Uconnect offers connections via USB,
Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped).
Voice operation is only available for connected
USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD player
optional and not available on all vehicles.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands and follow
the prompts to switch your media source or
choose an artist.
Uconnect 4 Radio
Uconnect 3 Media
• “Change source to Bluetooth”
• “Change source to AUX”
• “Change source to USB”
285
MULTIMEDIA
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone
calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
Uconnect 4 Media
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push
the VR button
and the Phone button and
say “Call,” then pronounce the name exactly
as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you
can say “Call John Smith work.”
Push the VR button
and the Phone
button. After the beep, say one of the following commands:
• “Call John Smith”
• “Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system
prompts”
• “Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)”
Uconnect 3 Phone
• “Call back (call previous incoming phone
number)”
Uconnect 4/4C NAV Media
Uconnect 4 Phone
286
Uconnect 4/4C NAV Phone
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect announces incoming text messages. Push the Phone
or VR button
and say “Listen.” (Must have compatible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to
or VR button
you, push the Phone
. After the beep, say: “Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Stuck in
Yes.
See you later.
traffic.
Start without
No.
I’ll be late.
me.
Where are
Okay.
I will be
you?
<number>
Are you there minutes late.
Call me.
yet?
I’ll call you
I need
See you in
later.
directions.
<number> of
I’m on my
minutes.
Can’t talk
way.
right now.
I’m lost.
Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full
implementation of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advantage of this feature.
For
details
about
MAP,
visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. To enable this
feature on your Apple iPhone, follow these
four simple steps:
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select The (i) For The Paired Vehicle
4 — Turn On “Show Notifications”
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with
iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped with
Siri Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send
a text message.
Climate
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle
is equipped with climate control.)
287
MULTIMEDIA
2. Then follow the system prompts.
. After the beep, say
Push the VR button
one of the following commands:
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR
button
. After the beep, say: “Find
nearest coffee shop.”
• “Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
• “Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of
your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
equipped.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-Inch
Display Climate
Navigation (4C NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you
save time and become more productive when
you know exactly how to get to where you
want to go.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Climate
288
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the beep, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills,
Michigan.”
Uconnect 4C NAV Navigation
SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV)— If
Equipped
CAUTION!
Some SiriusXM Guardian services, including SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call
will NOT work without an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network
connection compatible with your device.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is required to take advantage of the SiriusXM
Guardian services in the next section of this
guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian,
press the Apps button on the Uconnect
4C/4C NAV touchscreen to get started.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Guardian is available only on
equipped vehicles purchased within the continental United States, Alaska, Hawaii and
Canada. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for
details.
SOS Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Send & Go
Vehicle Finder
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn & Lights
Roadside Assistance Call
Vehicle Health Reports**
Vehicle Health Alert**
Performance Pages Plus**
**If vehicle is equipped.
Register (4C/4C NAV)
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM
Guardian in your vehicle, you must activate
your SiriusXM Guardian services.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from
your list of apps.
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a
SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent
who will activate services in your vehicle,
or select “Enter Email” to activate on the
web.
• U.S. residents visit:
www.siriusxm.com/guardian.
• Canadian residents visit:
www.siriusxm.ca/guardian.
Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV)
Your vehicle will send you a monthly email
report, which summarizes the performance of
your vehicle’s key systems so you can stay on
top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs if
you are registered for SiriusXM Guardian.
Your vehicle will also send you Vehicle Health
Alerts when it detects issues with its key
systems that need your attention. For further
information, refer to your owner’s manual.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
in-vehicle touchscreen.
289
MULTIMEDIA
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using
remote commands and sending a destination
from your phone to your vehicle.
• Once on the “Remote” screen, you can
begin using Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle Start, and activate your horn
and lights remotely, if equipped.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands:
• Press the “Location” button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to bring up a map to
locate your vehicle or send a location to
your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle
Finder and Send & Go , if equipped.
• “Show 5 - day weather forecast”
• “Show fuel prices”
• “Show extended weather”
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with
Voice Command.
• Press the “Settings” side menu in the upper left corner of the app to bring up app
settings.
NOTE:
For further information please visit
DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV)
Mobile App
To use the Uconnect Mobile App:
• Once you have registered your SiriusXM
Guardian services, download the Uconnect
App to your mobile device. Use your Owner
Account login and password to open the
app.
290
Need to find a gas station, view local movie
listings, check a sports score or the 5 - day
weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link is a
suite of services that brings a wealth of information right to your Uconnect 4C NAV system. (Not available for Uconnect 4 system.)
SiriusXM Travel Link
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text
messages, select media, place phone calls
and much more. Siri uses your natural language to understand what you mean and
responds back to confirm your requests. The
system is designed to keep your eyes on the
road and your hands on the wheel by letting
Siri help you perform useful tasks.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call or both, when declining
an incoming call and send it to voicemail.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release
the Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button
on the steering wheel. After you hear a double
beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and
music, get directions, read text messages and
many other useful requests.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to
you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Siri
Eyes Free Available
Using Do Not Disturb
Uconnect 4 Siri Eyes Free Available
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while you
were using Do Not Disturb.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can
be selected so you can still place a second
call without being interrupted by incoming
calls.
NOTE:
• Only the beginning of your custom message
will be seen on the touchscreen.
• Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only available on phones that supporting Bluetooth
MAP.
291
MULTIMEDIA
Android Auto — If Equipped
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped
Android Auto allows you to use your voice to
interact with Android’s best-in-class speech
technology through your vehicle’s voice recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your Android powered
smartphone and a number of its apps onto
your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your
Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or higher, to one of
the media USB ports, using the factoryprovided USB cable, and press the new
Android Auto icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin
Android Auto. Push and hold the VR button
on the steering wheel, or press and hold the
“Microphone” icon within Android Auto, to
activate Android’s VR, which recognizes
natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s data plan to project your iPhone and
a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone 5, or
higher, to one of the media USB ports, using
the factory-provided Lightning cable, and
press the new CarPlay icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin
Apple CarPlay. Press and hold the VR button
on the steering wheel, or press and hold the
“Home” button within Apple CarPlay, to activate Siri, which recognizes natural voice
commands to use a list of your iPhone’s
features:
Android Auto On 7-inch Display
• Phone
• Music
• Maps
Android Auto On 8.4-inch Display
• Music
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
• Phone
• Text Messages
• Additional Apps
292
• Messages
• Maps
• Additional Apps
Apple CarPlay On 7-inch Display
General Information
Additional Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
© 2017 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved.
Mopar and Uconnect are registered trademarks
and Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of
FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark of Google
Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks and logos
are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada licenseexempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Apple CarPlay On 8.4-inch Display
For Uconnect system support, call:
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
week) or visit DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
293
294
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . .296
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
FCA US LLC Customer Center . . . . .
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . .
In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . .
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . .
WARRANTY INFORMATION . . .297
.296
.296
.296
.296
MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
In Canada. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
PUBLICATION ORDER
FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
.296
295
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer
are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We
want you to be happy with our products and
services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that you
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They
know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high
quality service. The manufacturer's authorized dealer have the facilities, factorytrained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is
fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer service manager first. Most
matters can be resolved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied,
talk to the general manager or owner of the
authorized dealer. They want to know if you
need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve
the concern, you may contact the manufacturer's customer center.
296
Any communication to the manufacturer's
customer center should include the following
information:
• Owner's name and address
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
• Owner's telephone number (home and office)
Mexico, D. F.
• Authorized dealer name
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA Caribbean LLC
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 191857
P.O. Box 21–8004
San Juan 00919-1857
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the
Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any
hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the United States, can
communicate with the manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties
that require assistance can use the special
needs relay service offered by Bell Canada.
For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract
for a vehicle to help protect you from the high
cost of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires.
The manufacturer stands behind only the
manufacturer's service contracts. If you purchased a manufacturer's service contract,
you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner
Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have
any questions about the service contract, call
the manufacturer's Service Contract National
Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any
service contract that is not the manufacturer's service contract. It is not responsible for
any service contract other than the manufacturer's service contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer's
service contract, and you require service after
the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle.
An authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be
pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve
any warranty issues or related concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only), some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain, or
WARNING!
emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the
terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are available from an authorized dealer.
They are recommended for your vehicle in
order to help keep the vehicle operating at its
best.
297
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or
cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA
US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, an authorized dealer or FCA US LLC.
298
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236
(TTY:
1-800424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
SE.,
West
Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from http://
www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish
to report a safety defect to the Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to http://
www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
PUBLICATION ORDER
FORMS
• You can purchase a copy of the Owner's
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals or
Warranty Booklet. United States customers
may visit the Jeep Contact Us page at
www.jeep.com scroll to the bottom of the
page and select the “Contact Us” link, then
select the “Owner’s Manual and Glove
Compartment Material” from the left
menu. You can also purchase a copy by
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or
1-800-387-1143 (Canada).
• Replacement User Guide kits or, if you
prefer, additional printed copies of the
Owner's Manual, Warranty Booklet or Radio
Manuals may be purchased by visiting
www.techauthority.com or by calling
1-877-890-4038 (U.S.) or 1-800387-1143 (Canada). Visa, Master Card,
American Express and Discover orders are
accepted.
NOTE:
• The Owner's Manual and User Guide electronic files are also available on the
Chrysler, Jeep, Ram Truck, Dodge and SRT
websites.
• Click on the “For Owners” tab, select
“Owner/Service Manuals”. Then select your
desired model year and vehicle from the
drop down lists.
299
300
INDEX
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Mopar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Additives, Fuel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . .103
Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . .101, 104
Driver Knee Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . .108
Enhanced Accident Response . . . .112
Enhanced Accident Response . . . .196
Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . .196
Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
If Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . .112
Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . .108
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . .114
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . .102
Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . .59, 101, 128
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . .202
Air Conditioning Filter. . . . . . . . .43, 203
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . .42
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . .202, 203
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . .41, 202
Air Pressure
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Alarm
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Alarm (Security Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . .18
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . .18
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . .229
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . .72
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . .62, 66
Arming System (Security Alarm) . . . . . .18
Assist, Hill Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Audio Jack. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252, 259
Audio Systems (Radio) . . . . . . . . . . .246
Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . .43
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . .28
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . .41
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . .142
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . .205
Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Auto Unlock, Doors . . . .
Auto Up Power Windows.
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet
(Power Outlet) . . . . .
Auxiliary Power Outlet . .
Axle Fluid. . . . . . . . . .
Axle Lubrication . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . .21
. . . . . . . . . .44
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .51
. .51
.230
.230
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Back-Up Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 201
Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . .60
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Blind Spot Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . .81
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . .73
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . .204, 230
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . .142
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
301
INDEX
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . .128
Chains, Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Change Oil Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . .57
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . .178, 205
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Check Engine Light (Malfunction
Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . .127
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Child Restraint. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Child Restraints
Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118
Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . .125
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat
Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
Infants And Child Restraints . . . . .117
Lower Anchors And Tethers For
Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
Older Children And Child
Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
302
Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . .119
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Cleaning
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . .203
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Clock Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Computer, Trip/Travel. . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . .229
Cruise Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 68
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Customer Programmable Features . . . .266
Cybersecurity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . .28, 29
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202
Defroster, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . .129
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . .68
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . .28, 29
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . .193
Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280, 291
Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 61
Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 61
Driver’s Seat Tilt Back . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary
(Power Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
Electric Brake Control System
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . .72
Electric Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . .136
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . .73
Traction Control System . . . . . . . .73
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise
Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . .75
Electronic Throttle Control Warning
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . .166
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178, 205
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Emission Control System Maintenance . .69
Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Break-In Recommendations . . . . .135
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . .201
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . .229
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . .128
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112, 196
Exhaust Gas Cautions . . . . . . . . . . .128
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 130
Filters
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Flashers
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . .28, 30, 68
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 29
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Fluid Level Checks
Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Fluids And Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . .229
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 30
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Folding Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Forward Collision Warning . . . . . . . . . .83
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .192
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . .161
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . .227, 229
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . .161
Gasoline (Fuel). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139, 144
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . .192
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect) . . . . . .273
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . .166
Headlights
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 29
High Beam/Low Beam Select
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 29
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . .28
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Time Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 29
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Head Rests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Heated Mirrors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 29
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . .78
Hill Start Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
Hood Prop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . .57
303
INDEX
Instrument Cluster Display
Instrument Cluster Display . . . . . . .56
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . .223
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . .222
Interior Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . .31
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
Inverter, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
iPod/USB/MP3 Control
Bluetooth Streaming Audio . . . . . .273
Jacking Instructions
Jack Location . . . .
Jack Operation . . . .
Jump Starting . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. . . .
. . . .
.178,
. . . .
. . . .180
. . . .178
180, 205
. . . .188
Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . .18
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . .14, 17
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . .28, 30
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . .28, 31
304
LaneSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48, 49
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . .31, 33
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 101
Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . .29
Battery Saver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . .77
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .166
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . .28, 29
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . .28, 29, 30
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . .61
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . .166
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Headlights On Reminder . . . . . . . .28
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 29
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . .28, 29
Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . .78
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . .28
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Malfunction Indicator
(Check Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63
Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . .62
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . .64
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . .85
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . .28, 30, 68
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
Warning (Instrument Cluster
Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Loading Vehicle
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Load Shed
Battery Saver Mode . . . .
Battery Saver On . . . . .
Electrical Load Reduction
Intelligent Battery Sensor
Locks
Auto Unlock . . . . . . . .
Child Protection . . . . .
Low Tire Pressure System . .
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . .
Lug Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.57
.57
.57
.57
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .21
. .22
. .85
. .53
.227
Maintenance Free Battery . . . . . . . . .201
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . .198
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check
Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63, 69
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . .138, 205
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . .205
Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . .204
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) . . . . . .22
Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Memory Seats And Radio . . . . . . . . . .22
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .28
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . .85
Mopar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Mopar Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . .28, 30
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . .135
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .91
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . .227, 229
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . .61
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Oil Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . .68
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . .28
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . .191
Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) . . .298
Paddle Shifters . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ParkSense System, Rear . . . . . . . .
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect) . . . .
Phone (Pairing) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Phone (Uconnect) . . . . . . . . . . . .
Placard, Tire And Loading
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power
Glass Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lift Gate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet)
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts. . .
Preparation For Jacking . . . . . . . .
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.146
.136
.155
.127
.273
.276
.273
. .210
. . .45
. . .52
. . .49
. .51
. . .43
. . .99
. .179
. . .99
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Radio
Presets . . . . . . . . . . .246, 251, 258
Radio Frequency
General Information . . . . . . . . .17, 18
305
INDEX
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246
Radio Screens . . . . . . . . . . . .249, 256
Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . .31, 32
Rear Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Rear Cross Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . .155, 160
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Rear Seats, Folding. . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . .31, 33
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Release, Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Reminder, Lights On . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Disarm The Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Programming Additional Key Fobs . . .18
Replacement Keys. . . . . . . . . . . .14, 17
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . .298
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Restraints, Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
306
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . .128
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . .130
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . .298
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . .205
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .198
Seat Belt
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Energy Management Feature . . . . . .99
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . .95
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . .99
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . .92
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .222
Seat Belt Reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92, 128
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . .96
Adjustable Upper Shoulder
Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93, 95
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . .95
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . .95
Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . .95
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Vented . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Ventilated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18, 62
Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze). . . . .229
Sentry Key
Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . .14, 17
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298
Shifting
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .142
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . .138
Shift Lever Override. . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
Side View Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . .28
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . .28, 30, 68, 130
Siri . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
Sirius Satellite Radio
Traffic & Weather . . . . . . . . . . . .271
Sirius Travel Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . .271
SiriusXM Guardian . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
In Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . .239
Maintaining Your Account . . . . . . .239
Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
Remote Features . . . . . . . . . . . .242
Renewing Subscriptions . . . . . . . .239
Send & Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Vehicle Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . .243
Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . .289
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . .219
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Sound Systems (Radio) . . . . . . .252, 259
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Spare Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218, 219
Spark Plugs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229
Speed Control
Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . .153, 155
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . .153
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . .133
Starting And Operating . . . . . . . . . . .133
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
Steering
Column Controls . . . . . . . . . .28, 30
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
Sunroof
Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45, 46
Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Supplemental Restraint System - Air
Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
Sway Control, Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . .81
Telescoping Steering Column . . . . . . . .27
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . .41
Text Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . .247, 281
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
Time Delay, Headlight. . . . . . . . . .28, 29
Tire And Loading Information Placard . .210
Tire Markings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206
Tires. . . . . . . . . . . .130, 213, 218, 221
Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . .216
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . .178, 205
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
General Information . . . . . . . . . .213
307
INDEX
General Information . . . . . . . . . .218
General Information . . . . . . . . . .218
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Inflation Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178, 205
Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . .85
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205, 213
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Spare Tires . . . . . . . . . . . .218, 219
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . .215
Wheel Nut Torque . . . . . . . . . . . .227
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . .205
Tire Service Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
To Open Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . .195
Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
308
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . .193
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . .163
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Trailer Sway Control (TSC). . . . . . . . . .81
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Transfer Case
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . .142, 205
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . .215
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . .28, 30, 68
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244, 246
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display . . . . .249
Uconnect (Hands-Free Phone)
Making A Phone Call . . . . . .273, 280
Receiving A Call . . . . . . . . . . . .273
Uconnect Phone . . . . . . . .273, 280, 281
Uconnect Voice Command . . . . .280, 283
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . .221
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . .95
USB Port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252, 259
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). . .226
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Vehicle Security Alarm
(Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .280
Voice Recognition System
(VR). . . . . . . . . . . . . .280, 283, 291
Warning Flasher, Hazard . . . . . . . . . .166
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . .297
Washer
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 33
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . .31, 201
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . .44, 45, 46
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . .129
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . .31, 201
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .201
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . .203
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . .203
Wiper, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 33
309
310
311
312
This guide has been prepared to help you get
quickly acquainted with your new Jeep® brand
vehicle and to provide a convenient reference
source for common questions. However, it is not
a substitute for your Owner’s Manual.
Important
Get warranty and other information online – you can
review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties
provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting
www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of the
www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada)
homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable
year, make and model of your vehicle.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the
vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly
recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any
device or feature that may take their attention off the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones, computers,
portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver
while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could lead to a serious
collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be
done while the vehicle is moving.
If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or
texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to comply
with all local laws.
For complete operational instructions, maintenance
procedures and important safety messages, please
consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals found on the website on the back cover
and other Warning Labels in your vehicle.
Not all features shown in this guide may apply
to your vehicle. For additional information on
accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada)
or your local Jeep® brand dealer.
Driving and Alcohol
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with
blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to a collision.
Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your
vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident, or scheduling your next
appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep® brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride.
To get this app, go directly to the App Store or Google Play and enter the search keyword “JEEP”
(U.S. residents only).
www.jeep.com /en /owners (U.S.) provides special offers tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries,
personalized service records and more. To get this information, just create an account and check back often.
Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s
Manual, Navigation / Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle
by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the
“Popular Topics” area of the mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow
the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S. residents);
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).
18MP-926-AA
COMPASS
Fourth Edition
User Guide
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY of the most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
media and warranty booklet by visiting:
Jeep.com (U.S.)
Jeep.ca (Canada)
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
2 01 8 CO MPASS U S E R G U I D E
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising